2003 Chevrolet Impala Owner Manual M

Seats and Restraint Systems ........................... 1-1Front Seats ............................................... 1-2Rear Seats ............................................... 1-7Safety Belts .............................................. 1-9Child Restraints ....................................... 1-31Air Bag Systems ...................................... 1-51Restraint System Check ............................ 1-61

Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1Keys ........................................................ 2-2Doors and Locks ....................................... 2-8Windows ................................................. 2-13Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-16Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ........... 2-18Mirrors .................................................... 2-33OnStar® System ...................................... 2-37HomeLink® Transmitter ............................. 2-39Storage Areas ......................................... 2-43Sunroof .................................................. 2-44Vehicle Personalization ............................. 2-45

Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-4Climate Controls ...................................... 3-22Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ......... 3-28Message Center ....................................... 3-40Driver Information Center (DIC) .................. 3-49

Trip Computer ......................................... 3-52Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-53

Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..... 4-2Towing ................................................... 4-31

Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1Service ..................................................... 5-3Fuel ......................................................... 5-5Checking Things Under the Hood ............... 5-10Headlamp Aiming ..................................... 5-55Bulb Replacement .................................... 5-56Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ......... 5-60Tires ...................................................... 5-61Appearance Care ..................................... 5-85Vehicle Identification ................................. 5-93Electrical System ...................................... 5-94Capacities and Specifications ................... 5-103Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts .... 5-105

Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-1Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2

CustomerAssistance Information ...................... 7-1Customer Assistance Information .................. 7-2Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 7-10

Index .................................................................1

2003 Chevrolet Impala Owner Manual M

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem and the nameIMPALA are registered trademarks of General MotorsCorporation.

This manual includes the latest information at the time itwas printed. We reserve the right to make changesafter that time without further notice. For vehicles firstsold in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors ofCanada Limited” for Chevrolet Motor Division wheneverit appears in this manual.

Please keep this manual in your vehicle, so it will bethere if you ever need it when you’re on the road. If yousell the vehicle, please leave this manual in it so thenew owner can use it.

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 10325249 A First Edition

©Copyright General Motors Corporation 06/19/02All Rights Reserved

Canadian OwnersYou can obtain a French copy of this manual from yourdealer or from:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

How to Use This ManualMany people read their owner’s manual from beginningto end when they first receive their new vehicle. Ifyou do this, it will help you learn about the features andcontrols for your vehicle. In this manual, you will findthat pictures and words work together to explain things.

IndexA good place to look for what you need is the Index inback of the manual. It is an alphabetical list of whatis in the manual, and the page number where you willfind it.

ii

Safety Warnings and SymbolsYou will find a number of safety cautions in this book.We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell youabout things that could hurt you if you were to ignorethe warning.

{CAUTION:

These mean there is something that could hurtyou or other people.

In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce thehazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t, youor others could be hurt.

You will also find a circlewith a slash through it inthis book. This safetysymbol means “Don’t,”“Don’t do this” or “Don’t letthis happen.”

iii

Vehicle Damage WarningsAlso, in this book you will find these notices:

Notice: These mean there is something that coulddamage your vehicle.

A notice will tell you about something that can damageyour vehicle. Many times, this damage would not becovered by your warranty, and it could be costly. Butthe notice will tell you what to do to help avoidthe damage.

When you read other manuals, you might see CAUTIONand NOTICE warnings in different colors or in differentwords.

You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle. They usethe same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.

Vehicle SymbolsYour vehicle has components and labels that usesymbols instead of text. Symbols, used on your vehicle,are shown along with the text describing the operationor information relating to a specific component, control,message, gage or indicator.

If you need help figuring out a specific name of acomponent, gage or indicator, reference thefollowing topics:

• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1

• Features and Controls in Section 2

• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3

• Climate Controls in Section 3

• Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators in Section 3

• Audio System(s) in Section 3

• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5

iv

These are some examples of vehicle symbols you may find on your vehicle:

v

✍ NOTES

vi

Front Seats ......................................................1-2Manual Seats ................................................1-2Six-Way Power Seats .....................................1-3Manual Lumbar ..............................................1-3Heated Seats .................................................1-4Reclining Seatbacks ........................................1-4Head Restraints .............................................1-6

Rear Seats .......................................................1-7Split Folding Rear Seat ...................................1-7

Safety Belts .....................................................1-9Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone .................1-9Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......1-13How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-14Driver Position ..............................................1-15Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-22Right Front Passenger Position .......................1-23Center Front Passenger Position .....................1-23Rear Seat Passengers ..................................1-25Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children

and Small Adults .......................................1-28Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-30

Child Restraints .............................................1-31Older Children ..............................................1-31Infants and Young Children ............................1-33

Child Restraint Systems .................................1-37Where to Put the Restraint .............................1-40Top Strap ....................................................1-41Top Strap Anchor Location .............................1-42Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for

Children (LATCH System) ...........................1-43Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the

LATCH System .........................................1-45Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat

Position ...................................................1-45Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front

Seat Position ............................................1-48

Air Bag Systems ............................................1-51Where Are the Air Bags? ...............................1-54When Should an Air Bag Inflate? ....................1-56What Makes an Air Bag Inflate? .....................1-57How Does an Air Bag Restrain? .....................1-57What Will You See After an Air Bag Inflates? ...1-58Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle .........1-60

Restraint System Check ..................................1-61Checking Your Restraint Systems ...................1-61Replacing Restraint System Parts After a

Crash ......................................................1-62

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

1-1

Front Seats

Manual Seats

{CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle if you try toadjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicleis moving. The sudden movement could startleand confuse you, or make you push a pedalwhen you don’t want to. Adjust the driver’sseat only when the vehicle is not moving.

If your vehicle has manual seats, lift the bar locatedunder the front of the seat to unlock it. Slide the seat towhere you want it and release the bar. Try to movethe seat back and forth to be sure the seat is lockedin place.

1-2

Six-Way Power Seats

If your vehicle has this feature, the control is located onthe outboard side of the front seats toward the frontof the seat cushion. To adjust the seat do any ofthe following:

• Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding thecontrol to the front or the rear.

• Raise or lower the seat by sliding the control up ordown.

• Raise or lower the front portion of the seat cushionby sliding the front of the control up or down.

• Raise or lower the rear portion of the seat cushionby sliding the rear of the control up or down.

Manual Lumbar

If your vehicle has this feature, the knob is located onthe outboard side of the driver’s seat. Turn the knobtoward the front of the vehicle to increase lumbarsupport. Turn the knob toward the rear of the vehicle todecrease lumbar support.

1-3

Heated Seats

If your vehicle has this option, the driver’s andpassenger’s heated seat switches are located on theoutboard side of the seat near the front.

Press LO to warm the seat to a lower temperature.Press HI to warm the seat to a higher temperature.To turn this feature off, move the switch to thecenter position.

Reclining Seatbacks

Lift the lever to release the seatback, then move theseatback to where you want it. Release the lever tolock the seatback in place. Pull up on the lever withoutpushing on the seatback and the seatback willmove forward.

1-4

But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicleis moving.

{CAUTION:

Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicleis in motion can be dangerous. Even if youbuckle up, your safety belts can’t do their jobwhen you’re reclined like this.

The shoulder belt can’t do its job. In a crash,you could go into it, receiving neck orother injuries.

The lap belt can’t do its job either. In a crashthe belt could go up over your abdomen.The belt forces would be there, not at yourpelvic bones. This could cause seriousinternal injuries.

For proper protection when the vehicle is inmotion, have the seatback upright. Then sitwell back in the seat and wear your safetybelt properly.

1-5

Head Restraints Adjust your head restraint so that the top of the restraintis closest to the top of your head. This positionreduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.

1-6

Rear Seats

Split Folding Rear SeatIf your vehicle has this feature you can fold either sideof the seatback down for more cargo space. Makesure the front seat isn’t reclined. If it is, the rear seatbackwon’t fold down all the way.

To lower the rear seatback, follow these steps:1. Remove the rear

center lap-shoulder beltlatch by using apointed object to pressthe release button.

2. Pull forward on theseat tab located on theoutboard side of theseatback cushionand fold the seatbackdown. This willallow you direct accessto the trunk.

1-7

To raise the rear seatback, follow these steps:1. Raise the seatback up and make sure it latches.

Push and pull on the seatback to be sure it islocked in position.

2. Reconnect the centersafety belt latch plateto the buckle.

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is improperly routed, notproperly attached, or twisted won’t provide theprotection needed in a crash. The personwearing the belt could be seriously injured.

CAUTION: (Continued)


After raising the rear seatback, always checkto be sure that the safety belts are properlyrouted and attached, and are not twisted.

Make sure the safety belt label is pointing to the releasebutton, and that both are facing the front of thevehicle. Make sure the belt is not twisted. Push and pullon the latch plate to be sure it is secure.

{CAUTION:

If the seatback isn’t locked, it could moveforward in a sudden stop or crash. That couldcause injury to the person sitting there. Alwayspress rearward on the seatback to be sure itis locked.

When the seat is not in use, it should be kept in theupright locked position.

1-8

Safety Belts

Safety Belts: They Are for EveryoneThis part of the manual tells you how to use safetybelts properly. It also tells you some things you shouldnot do with safety belts.

{CAUTION:

Don’t let anyone ride where he or she can’twear a safety belt properly. If you are in acrash and you’re not wearing a safety belt,your injuries can be much worse. You can hitthings inside the vehicle or be ejected from it.You can be seriously injured or killed. In thesame crash, you might not be, if you arebuckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,and check that your passengers’ belts arefastened properly too.

{CAUTION:

It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargoarea, inside or outside of a vehicle. In acollision, people riding in these areas are morelikely to be seriously injured or killed. Do notallow people to ride in any area of your vehiclethat is not equipped with seats and safetybelts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in aseat and using a safety belt properly.

1-9

Your vehicle has a lightthat comes on as areminder to buckle up. SeeSafety Belt ReminderLight on page 3-32.

In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the lawsays to wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work.

You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have acrash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one.

A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be soserious that even buckled up, a person wouldn’t survive.But most crashes are in between. In many of them,people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walkaway. Without belts they could have been badly hurtor killed.

After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles, thefacts are clear. In most crashes buckling up doesmatter... a lot!

Why Safety Belts WorkWhen you ride in or on anything, you go as fast asit goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s just a seat onwheels.

1-10

Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The riderdoesn’t stop.

1-11

The person keeps going until stopped by something. Ina real vehicle, it could be the windshield...

or the instrument panel...

1-12

or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s whysafety belts make such good sense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after anaccident if I’m wearing a safety belt?

A: You could be – whether you’re wearing a safetybelt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,even if you’re upside down. And your chanceof being conscious during and after an accident,so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater ifyou are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has air bags, why should I have towear safety belts?

A: Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be inmost of them in the future. But they aresupplemental systems only; so they work withsafety belts – not instead of them. Every air bagsystem ever offered for sale has required theuse of safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle thathas air bags, you still have to buckle up to getthe most protection. That’s true not only in frontalcollisions, but especially in side and other collisions.

1-13

Q: If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far fromhome, why should I wear safety belts?

A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in anaccident – even one that isn’t your fault – you andyour passengers can be hurt. Being a gooddriver doesn’t protect you from things beyond yourcontrol, such as bad drivers.

Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) ofhome. And the greatest number of serious injuriesand deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph(65 km/h).

Safety belts are for everyone.

How to Wear Safety Belts ProperlyThis part is only for people of adult size.

Be aware that there are special things to know aboutsafety belts and children. And there are differentrules for smaller children and babies. If a child will beriding in your vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-31or Infants and Young Children on page 1-33. Followthose rules for everyone’s protection.

First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems yourvehicle has.

We’ll start with the driver position.

1-14

Driver PositionThis part describes the driver’s restraint system.

Lap-Shoulder BeltThe driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s how to wear itproperly.

1. Close and lock the door.

2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. To seehow, see “Seats” in the Index.

3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.Don’t let it get twisted.The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the beltacross you very quickly. If this happens, let the beltgo back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the beltacross you more slowly.

4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.If the belt isn’t long enough, see Safety BeltExtender on page 1-30.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbuckle thesafety belt quickly if you ever had to.

1-15

5. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckleend of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt.

The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug onthe hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, thisapplies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d beless likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it,the belt would apply force at your abdomen. Thiscould cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulder and across the chest.These parts of the body are best able to take beltrestraining forces.

The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or crash,or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.

1-16

Shoulder Belt Height AdjusterBefore you begin to drive, move the shoulder beltadjuster to the height that is right for you.

To move it down, squeeze the release lever and theshoulder belt guide as shown and move the heightadjuster to the desired position. You can movethe adjuster up just by pushing up on the shoulder beltguide. After you move the adjuster to where youwant it, try to move it down without squeezing therelease lever to make sure it has locked into position.

Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the beltis centered on your shoulder. The belt should beaway from your face and neck, but not falling off yourshoulder.

1-17

Q: What’s wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It won’t give nearlyas much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder beltis too loose. In a crash, you would moveforward too much, which could increase injury.The shoulder belt should fit against your body.

1-18


A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt isbuckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,the belt would go up over your abdomen. Thebelt forces would be there, not at the pelvicbones. This could cause serious internalinjuries. Always buckle your belt into thebuckle nearest you.

1-19


A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It shouldbe worn over the shoulder at all times.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if you wear theshoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, yourbody would move too far forward, which wouldincrease the chance of head and neck injury.Also, the belt would apply too much force tothe ribs, which aren’t as strong as shoulderbones. You could also severely injure internalorgans like your liver or spleen.

1-20


A: The belt is twisted across the body.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.In a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width ofthe belt to spread impact forces. If a belt istwisted, make it straight so it can workproperly, or ask your dealer to fix it.

1-21

To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.The belt should go back out of the way.

Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of theway. If you slam the door on it, you can damageboth the belt and your vehicle.

Safety Belt Use During PregnancySafety belts work for everyone, including pregnantwomen. Like all occupants, they are more likely to beseriously injured if they don’t wear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, andthe lap portion should be worn as low as possible,below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.

1-22

The best way to protect the fetus is to protect themother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s morelikely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. Forpregnant women, as for anyone, the key to makingsafety belts effective is wearing them properly.

Right Front Passenger PositionTo learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safetybelt properly, see Driver Position on page 1-15.

The right front passenger’s safety belt works the sameway as the driver’s safety belt – except for one thing.If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out all theway, you will engage the child restraint locking feature.If this happens, just let the belt go back all the wayand start again.

Center Front Passenger Position

1-23

Lap BeltIf your vehicle has a front bench seat, someone can sitin the center position.

When you sit in the center front seating position, youhave a lap safety belt, which has no retractor. To makethe belt longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it alongthe belt.

To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shownuntil the belt is snug.

Buckle, position and release it the same way as the lappart of a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt is not longenough, see Safety Belt Extender on page 1-30.

Make sure the release button on the buckle is positionedso you would be able to unbuckle the safety beltquickly if you ever had to.

1-24

Rear Seat PassengersIt’s very important for rear seat passengers to buckleup! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in therear seat are hurt more often in crashes than thosewho are wearing safety belts.

Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted can bethrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strikeothers in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.

Rear Seat Passenger Positions

1-25

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll rear seating positions have lap-shoulder belts. Here’show to wear one properly.

1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.Don’t let it get twisted.The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the beltacross you very quickly. If this happens, let the beltgo back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the beltacross you more slowly.

2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way,it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way andstart again. If the belt is not long enough, seeSafety Belt Extender on page 1-30. Make sure therelease button on the buckle is positioned sothat you would be able to unbuckle the safety beltquickly if you ever had to.

3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckleend of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.

1-26

The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug onthe hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, thisapplies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d beless likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it,the belt would apply force at your abdomen. Thiscould cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulder and across thechest. These parts of the body are best able to take beltrestraining forces.

The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or a crash,or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder beltis too loose. In a crash, you would moveforward too much, which could increase injury.The shoulder belt should fit against your body.

To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.

1-27

Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides forChildren and Small AdultsYour vehicle may have this feature already. If it doesn’t,you can get it from any GM dealer.

Rear shoulder belt comfort guides will provide addedsafety belt comfort for older children who have outgrownbooster seats and for small adults. When installed ona shoulder belt, the comfort guide better positionsthe belt away from the neck and head.

There is one comfort guide available for each outsidepassenger position in the rear seat. To provideadded safety belt comfort for children who haveoutgrown child restraints and booster seats and forsmaller adults, the comfort guides may be installed onthe shoulder belts. Here’s how to install a comfort guideand use the safety belt:

1. Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge ofthe seatback and the interior body to remove theguide from its storage clip.

1-28

2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The elasticcord must be under the belt. Then, place the guideover the belt, and insert the two edges of thebelt into the slots of the guide.

3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.The elastic cord must be under the belt and theguide on top.

1-29

4. Buckle, position and release the safety belt asdescribed in Rear Seat Passengers on page 1-25.Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses theshoulder.

To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze thebelt edges together so that you can take them out of theguides. Pull the guide upward to expose its storageclip, and then slide the guide into the clip. Turn the guideand clip inward and in between the seatback and theinterior body, leaving only the loop of elastic cordexposed.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, youshould use it.

But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten, yourdealer will order you an extender. It’s free. When you goin to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, sothe extender will be long enough for you. The extenderwill be just for you, and just for the seat in yourvehicle that you choose. Don’t let someone else use it,and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. To wearit, just attach it to the regular safety belt.

1-30

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrown booster seats shouldwear the vehicle’s safety belts.

Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?

A: If possible, an older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint ashoulder belt can provide. The shoulder beltshould not cross the face or neck. The lap beltshould fit snugly below the hips, just touching thetop of the thighs. It should never be worn overthe abdomen, which could cause severe or evenfatal internal injuries in a crash.

Accident statistics show that children are safer if theyare restrained in the rear seat.

In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strikeother people who are buckled up, or can be thrownout of the vehicle. Older children need to use safetybelts properly.

1-31

{CAUTION:

Never do this.Here two children are wearing the same belt.The belt can’t properly spread the impactforces. In a crash, the two children can becrushed together and seriously injured. A beltmust be used by only one person at a time.

Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,but the child is so small that the shoulder beltis very close to the child’s face or neck?

A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to a window,move the child toward the center of the vehicle. Ifthe child is sitting in the center rear seatpassenger position, move the child toward thesafety belt buckle. In either case, be sure that theshoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, sothat in a crash the child’s upper body would havethe restraint that the belts provide.

If the child is sitting in a rear seat outside position,see Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Childrenand Small Adults on page 1-28.

1-32

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here a child is sitting in a seat that has alap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part isbehind the child. If the child wears the belt in



this way, in a crash the child might slide underthe belt. The belt’s force would then be appliedright on the child’s abdomen. That could causeserious or fatal injuries.

Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the beltshould be worn low and snug on the hips, just touchingthe child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’spelvic bones in a crash.

Infants and Young ChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needs protection! This includesinfants and all other children. Neither the distancetraveled nor the age and size of the traveler changesthe need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,the law in every state in the United States and inevery Canadian province says children up to some agemust be restrained while in a vehicle.

Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,they should have the protection provided by appropriaterestraints. Young children should not use the vehicle’sadult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice.Instead, they need to use a child restraint.

1-33

{CAUTION:

People should never hold a baby in their armswhile riding in a vehicle. A baby doesn’t weighmuch -- until a crash. During a crash a babywill become so heavy it is not possible to holdit. For example, in a crash at only 25 mph(40 km/h), a 12-lb. (5.5 kg) baby will suddenlybecome a 240-lb. (110 kg) force on a person’sarms. A baby should be secured in anappropriate restraint.

1-34

{CAUTION:

Children who are up against, or very close to,any air bag when it inflates can be seriouslyinjured or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulderbelts offer outstanding protection for adultsand older children, but not for young childrenand infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety beltsystem nor its air bag system is designed forthem. Young children and infants need theprotection that a child restraint system canprovide.

1-35

Q: What are the different types of add-on childrestraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased bythe vehicle’s owner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particular restraint should takeinto consideration not only the child’s weight,height and age but also whether or not the restraintwill be compatible with the motor vehicle inwhich it will be used.

For most basic types of child restraints, there aremany different models available. When purchasing achild restraint, be sure it is designed to be usedin a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have alabel saying that it meets federal motor vehiclesafety standards.

The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that comewith the restraint state the weight and heightlimitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,there are many kinds of restraints available forchildren with special needs.

{CAUTION:

Newborn infants need complete support,including support for the head and neck. Thisis necessary because a newborn infant’s neckis weak and its head weighs so muchcompared with the rest of its body. In a crash,an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into therestraint, so the crash forces can bedistributed across the strongest part of aninfant’s body, the back and shoulders. Infantsalways should be secured in appropriate infantrestraints.

1-36

{CAUTION:

The body structure of a young child is quiteunlike that of an adult or older child, for whomthe safety belts are designed. A young child’ship bones are still so small that the vehicle’sregular safety belt may not remain low on thehip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settleup around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, thebelt would apply force on a body area that’sunprotected by any bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatal injuries. Youngchildren always should be secured inappropriate child restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in amotor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designedto restrain or position a child on a continuous flatsurface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests towardthe center of the vehicle.

1-37

A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with theseating surface against the back of the infant. Theharness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash,acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.

A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint forthe child’s body with the harness and also sometimeswith surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.

1-38

A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed toimprove the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. Somebooster seats have a shoulder belt positioner, andsome high-back booster seats have a five-point harness.A booster seat can also help a child to see out thewindow.

Q: How do child restraints work?

A: A child restraint system is any device designed foruse in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or positionchildren. A built-in child restraint system is apermanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-onchild restraint system is a portable one, whichis purchased by the vehicle’s owner.

For many years, add-on child restraints have usedthe adult belt system in the vehicle. To helpreduce the chance of injury, the child also has to besecured within the restraint. The vehicle’s beltsystem secures the add-on child restraint in thevehicle, and the add-on child restraint’s harnesssystem holds the child in place within the restraint.

One system, the three-point harness, has strapsthat come down over each of the infant’s shouldersand buckle together at the crotch. The five-pointharness system has two shoulder straps, twohip straps and a crotch strap. A shield may take theplace of hip straps. A T-shaped shield hasshoulder straps that are attached to a flat pad whichrests low against the child’s body. A shelf- orarmrest-type shield has straps that are attached toa wide, shelf-like shield that swings up or tothe side.

1-39

When choosing a child restraint, be sure the childrestraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is, itwill have a label saying that it meets federal motorvehicle safety standards.

Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You mayfind these instructions on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system inyour vehicle, but the child also has to be securedwithin the restraint to help reduce the chance of personalinjury. When securing an add-on child restraint, referto the instructions that come with the restraint which maybe on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, andto this manual. The child restraint instructions areimportant, so if they are not available, obtain areplacement copy from the manufacturer.

Where to Put the RestraintAccident statistics show that children are safer if theyare restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.General Motors, therefore, recommends that childrestraints be secured in a rear seat, including an infantriding in a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in aforward-facing child seat and an older child riding in abooster seat. Never put a rear-facing child restraintin the front passenger seat. Here’s why:

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint can beseriously injured or killed if the right frontpassenger’s air bag inflates. This is becausethe back of the rear-facing child restraintwould be very close to the inflating air bag.Always secure a rear-facing child restraint in arear seat.

You may secure a forward-facing childrestraint in the right front seat, but before youdo, always move the front passenger seat asfar back as it will go. It’s better to secure thechild restraint in a rear seat.

1-40

{CAUTION:

A child in a child restraint in the center frontseat can be badly injured or killed by the rightfront passenger’s air bag if it inflates. Neversecure a child restraint in the center front seat.It’s always better to secure a child restraint inthe rear seat. You may secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right front passenger seat,but before you do, always move the frontpassenger seat as far back as it will go. It’sbetter to secure the child restraint in a rearseat.

Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the childrestraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secureany child restraint in your vehicle – even when no childis in it.

Top StrapSome child restraints have a top strap, or “top tether.”It can help restrain the child restraint during a collision.For it to work, a top strap must be properly anchoredto the vehicle. Some top strap-equipped child restraintsare designed for use with or without the top strapbeing anchored. Others require the top strap alwaysto be anchored. Be sure to read and follow theinstructions for your child restraint. If yours requiresthat the top strap be anchored, don’t use the restraintunless it is anchored properly.

If the child restraint does not have a top strap, one canbe obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kitis available.

1-41

In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing childrestraints have a top strap, and that the strap beanchored. In the United States, some child restraintsalso have a top strap. If your child restraint has atop strap, it should be anchored.

Anchor the top strap to an anchor point specified in TopStrap Anchor Location on page 1-42. Be sure to usean anchor point located on the same side of the vehicleas the seating position where the child restraint willbe placed.

Once you have the top strap anchored, you’ll be readyto secure the child restraint itself. Tighten the topstrap when and as the child restraint manufacturer’sinstructions say.

Top Strap Anchor Location

Your vehicle has top strap anchors already installed forthe rear seating positions. You’ll find them behindthe rear seat on the filler panel.

1-42

Lower Anchorages and Top Tethersfor Children (LATCH System)Your vehicle has the LATCH system. You’ll findanchors (A) in all three rear seating positions.

To assist you in locatingthe lower anchors for thischild restraint system,each seating position withthe LATCH system willhave a dot on the seatbackdirectly above the anchor.

In order to use the system, you need either aforward-facing child restraint that has attachingpoints (B) at its base and a top tether anchor (C), or arear-facing child restraint that has attaching points (B),as shown here.

1-43

With this system, use the LATCH system instead of thevehicle’s safety belts to secure a child restraint.

{CAUTION:

If a LATCH-type child restraint isn’t attached toits anchorage points, the restraint won’t beable to protect the child correctly. In a crash,the child could be seriously injured or killed.Make sure that a LATCH-type child restraint isproperly installed using the anchorage points,or use the vehicle’s safety belts to secure therestraint. See “Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCH System”, “Securing aChild Restraint in a Rear Outside SeatPosition” or “Securing a Child Restraint in aCenter Rear Seat Position” in the Index forinformation on how to secure a child restraintin your vehicle.

1-44

Securing a Child Restraint Designedfor the LATCH System

1. Find the anchors for the seating position you wantto use, where the bottom of the seatback meets theback of the seat cushion.

2. Put the child restraint on the seat.

3. Attach the anchor points on the child restraint to theanchors in the vehicle. The child restraintinstructions will show you how.

4. If the child restraint is forward-facing, attach the topstrap to the top strap anchor. See Top Strap onpage 1-41. Tighten the top strap according tothe child restraint instructions.

5. Push and pull the child restraint in differentdirections to be sure it is secure.

To remove the child restraint, simply unhook the topstrap from the top tether anchor and then disconnect theanchor points.

Securing a Child Restraint in a RearSeat Position

If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) on page 1-43.

1-45

{CAUTION:

A child in a child restraint in the center frontseat can be badly injured or killed by the rightfront passenger’s air bag if it inflates. Neversecure a child restraint in the center front seat.It’s always better to secure a child restraint inthe rear seat. You may secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right front passenger seat,but before you do, always move the frontpassenger seat as far back as it will go. It’sbetter to secure the child restraint in a rearseat.

You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See Top Strap onpage 1-41 if the child restraint has one. Be sure tofollow the instructions that came with the child restraint.Secure the child in the child restraint when and asthe instructions say.

1. Put the restraint on the seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulderportions of the vehicle’s safety belt through oraround the restraint. The child restraint instructionswill show you how.

3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button ispositioned so you would be able to unbuckle thesafety belt quickly if you ever had to.

1-46

4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out ofthe retractor to set the lock.

5. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back intothe retractor while you push down on the childrestraint. If you’re using a forward-facing childrestraint, you may find it helpful to use your knee topush down on the child restraint as you tightenthe belt.


1-47

To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’ssafety belt and let it go back all the way. The safetybelt will move freely again and be ready to work for anadult or larger child passenger.

Securing a Child Restraint in theRight Front Seat Position

If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) on page 1-43.

Your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag.Never put a rear-facing child restraint in this seat.Here’s why:

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint can beseriously injured or killed if the right frontpassenger’s air bag inflates. This is becausethe back of the rear-facing child restraintwould be very close to the inflating air bag.Always secure a rear-facing child restraint in arear seat.

Although a rear seat is a safer place, you can secure aforward-facing child restraint in the right front seat.

You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier partabout the Top Strap on page 1-41, if the child restrainthas one. Be sure to follow the instructions that camewith the child restraint. Secure the child in the childrestraint when and as the instructions say.

1. Because your vehicle has a right front passengerair bag, always move the seat as far back as it willgo before securing a forward-facing child restraint.See Manual Seats on page 1-2.

2. Put the restraint on the seat.

1-48

3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulderportions of the vehicle’s safety belt through oraround the restraint. The child restraint instructionswill show you how.

4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button ispositioned so you would be able to unbuckle thesafety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out ofthe retractor to set the lock.

1-49

6. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back intothe retractor while you push down on the childrestraint. You may find it helpful to use your knee topush down on the child restraint as you tightenthe belt.


To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’ssafety belt and let it go back all the way. The safetybelt will move freely again and be ready to work for anadult or larger child passenger.

1-50

Air Bag SystemsThis part explains the frontal and side impact airbag systems.

Your vehicle has air bags – a frontal air bag for thedriver and another frontal air bag for the right frontpassenger. Your vehicle may also have a side impactair bag for the driver.

If your vehicle has a sideimpact air bag for thedriver it will say AIR BAGon the air bag coveringon the side of the driver’sseatback closest tothe door.

Frontal air bags are designed to help reduce the risk ofinjury from the force of an inflating frontal air bag.But these air bags must inflate very quickly to do theirjob and comply with federal regulations.

1-51

Here are the most important things to know about theair bag systems:

{CAUTION:

You can be severely injured or killed in a crashif you aren’t wearing your safety belt, even ifyou have air bags. Wearing your safety beltduring a crash helps reduce your chance ofhitting things inside the vehicle or beingejected from it. Air bags are designed to workwith safety belts but don’t replace them.

Frontal air bags for the driver and right frontpassenger are designed to deploy only inmoderate to severe frontal and near frontalcrashes. They aren’t designed to inflate at all



in rollover, rear or low-speed frontal crashes,or in many side crashes. And, for someunrestrained occupants, frontal air bags mayprovide less protection in frontal crashes thanmore forceful air bags have provided inthe past.

The side impact air bag for the driver isdesigned to inflate only in moderate to severecrashes where something hits the driver’s sideof your vehicle. It isn’t designed to inflate infrontal, in rollover or in rear crashes.

Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safetybelt properly, whether or not there’s an air bagfor that person.

1-52

{CAUTION:

Both frontal and side impact air bags inflatewith great force, faster than the blink of aneye. If you’re too close to an inflating air bag,as you would be if you were leaning forward, itcould seriously injure you. Safety belts helpkeep you in position for air bag inflation beforeand during a crash. Always wear your safetybelt, even with frontal air bags. The drivershould sit as far back as possible while stillmaintaining control of the vehicle, and shouldnot lean on the door.

{CAUTION:

Anyone who is up against, or very close to,any air bag when it inflates can be seriouslyinjured or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulderbelts offer the best protection for adults, but



not for young children and infants. Neither thevehicle’s safety belt system nor its air bagsystem is designed for them. Young childrenand infants need the protection that a childrestraint system can provide. Always securechildren properly in your vehicle. To read how,see the part of this manual called “OlderChildren” or “Infants and Young Children.”

There is an air bagreadiness light on theinstrument panel, whichshows the air bag symbol.

The system checks the air bag electrical system formalfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electricalproblem. See Air Bag Readiness Light on page 3-33for more information.

1-53

Where Are the Air Bags? The driver’s frontal air bag is in the middle of thesteering wheel.

The right front passenger’s frontal air bag is in theinstrument panel on the passenger’s side.

1-54

If your vehicle has one, the driver’s side impact airbag is in the side of the driver’s seatback closest tothe door.

{CAUTION:

If something is between an occupant and anair bag, the bag might not inflate properly or itmight force the object into that person causingsevere injury or even death. The path of aninflating air bag must be kept clear. Don’t putanything between an occupant and an air bag,and don’t attach or put anything on thesteering wheel hub or on or near any other airbag covering. Don’t let seat covers block theinflation path of a side impact air bag.

1-55

When Should an Air Bag Inflate?The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal air bagsare designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontalor near-frontal crashes. But they are designed to inflateonly if the impact speed is above the system’sdesigned “threshold level.”

In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontal airbags, which adjust the amount of restraint according tocrash severity. For moderate frontal impacts, theseair bags inflate at a level less than full deployment. Formore severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wall thatdoes not move or deform, the threshold level for thereduced deployment is about 12 to 18 mph (19 to29 km/h), and the threshold level for a full deployment isabout 18 to 24 mph (29 to 38.5 km/h). The thresholdlevel can vary, however, with specific vehicle design, sothat it can be somewhat above or below this range.

If your vehicle strikes something that will move ordeform, such as a parked car, the threshold level will behigher. The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontalair bags are not designed to inflate in rollovers, rearimpacts, or in many side impacts because inflationwould not help the occupant.

Your vehicle may or may not have a driver side air bag.See Air Bag Systems on page 1-51. A driver ’s sideimpact air bag is designed to inflate in moderateto severe side crashes involving the driver’s door. Aside impact air bag will inflate if the crash severityis above the system’s designed “threshold level.” Thethreshold level can vary with specific vehicle design. Adriver’s side impact air bag is not designed to inflatein frontal or near-frontal impacts, rollovers or rearimpacts, because inflation would not help the occupant.

In any particular crash, no one can say whether anair bag should have inflated simply because ofthe damage to a vehicle or because of what the repaircosts were. For frontal air bags, inflation is determinedby the angle of the impact and how quickly thevehicle slows down in frontal and near-frontal impacts.For side impact air bags, inflation is determined bythe location and severity of the impact.

1-56

What Makes an Air Bag Inflate?In an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensingsystem detects that the vehicle is in a crash. Forboth the frontal and side impact air bags, the sensingsystem triggers a release of gas from the inflator, whichinflates the air bag. The inflator, air bag and relatedhardware are all part of the air bag modules. Frontal airbag modules are located inside the steering wheeland instrument panel. For vehicles with a driver’s sideimpact air bag, the air bag moules are located inthe seatback closest to the driver’s door.

How Does an Air Bag Restrain?In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel orthe instrument panel. In moderate to severe sidecollisions, even belted occupants can contact the insideof the vehicle. The air bag supplements the protectionprovided by safety belts. Air bags distribute the force ofthe impact more evenly over the occupant’s upperbody, stopping the occupant more gradually. But thefrontal air bags would not help you in many typesof collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts, and manyside impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motionis not toward the air bag. A side impact air bagwould not help you in many types of collisions, includingfrontal or near frontal collisions, rollovers, and rearimpacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion is nottoward that air bag. Air bags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplement to safety belts,and then only in moderate to severe frontal ornear-frontal collisions for the driver’s and right frontpassenger’s frontal air bags, and only in moderate tosevere side collisions for vehicles with a driver’sside impact air bag.

1-57

What Will You See After an Air BagInflates?After the air bag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quicklythat some people may not even realize the air baginflated. Some components of the air bag module will behot for a short time. These components include thesteering wheel hub for the driver’s frontal air bag and theinstrument panel for the right front passenger’s frontalair bag. For vehicle’s with a driver’s side impact air bag,the side of the seatback closest to the driver’s doorwill be hot. The parts of the bag that come into contactwith you may be warm, but not too hot to touch.There will be some smoke and dust coming from thevents in the deflated air bags. Air bag inflation doesn’tprevent the driver from seeing or being able to steer thevehicle, nor does it stop people from leaving the vehicle.

{CAUTION:

When an air bag inflates, there is dust in theair. This dust could cause breathing problemsfor people with a history of asthma or otherbreathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone inthe vehicle should get out as soon as it is safeto do so. If you have breathing problems butcan’t get out of the vehicle after an air baginflates, then get fresh air by opening awindow or a door. If you experience breathingproblems following an air bag deployment, youshould seek medical attention.

Your vehicle has a feature that will automatically unlockthe doors and turn the interior lamps on when the airbags inflate (if battery power is available). You can lockthe doors again and turn the interior lamps off byusing the door lock and interior lamp controls.

1-58

In many crashes severe enough to inflate an air bag,windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakage may also occur from theright front passenger air bag.

• Air bags are designed to inflate only once. After anair bag inflates, you’ll need some new parts foryour air bag system. If you don’t get them, the airbag system won’t be there to help protect youin another crash. A new system will include air bagmodules and possibly other parts. The servicemanual for your vehicle covers the need to replaceother parts.

• Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic frontalsensor, which helps the sensing system distinguishbetween a moderate frontal impact and a moresevere frontal impact. Your vehicle is also equippedwith a crash sensing and diagnostic module,which records information about the frontal air bagsystem. The module records information aboutthe readiness of the system, when the systemcommands air bag inflation and driver’s safety beltusage at deployment. The module also recordsspeed, engine RPM, brake and throttle data.

• Let only qualified technicians work on your air bagsystems. Improper service can mean that an airbag system won’t work properly. See your dealerfor service.

Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’sor the right front passenger’s air bag, or the airbag covering on the driver’s seatback, the bag maynot work properly. You may have to replace theair bag module in the steering wheel, both the airbag module and the instrument panel for theright front passenger’s air bag, or the air bagmodule and seatback for the driver’s side impact airbag. Do not open or break the air bag coverings.

1-59

Servicing Your Air Bag-EquippedVehicleAir bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.There are parts of the air bag systems in several placesaround your vehicle. Your dealer and the servicemanual have information about servicing your vehicleand the air bag systems. To purchase a service manual,see Service Publications Ordering Information onpage 7-11.

{CAUTION:

For up to 10 seconds after the ignition key isturned off and the battery is disconnected, anair bag can still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if you are close toan air bag when it inflates. Avoid yellowconnectors. They are probably part of the airbag system. Be sure to follow proper serviceprocedures, and make sure the personperforming work for you is qualified to do so.

The air bag systems do not need regular maintenance.

1-60

Restraint System Check

Checking Your Restraint SystemsNow and then, make sure the safety belt reminder lightand all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractorsand anchorages are working properly. Look for any otherloose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you seeanything that might keep a safety belt system from doingits job, have it repaired.

Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in acrash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a beltis torn or frayed, get a new one right away.

Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, andhave them repaired or replaced. (The air bag systemdoes not need regular maintenance.)

1-61

Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash

{CAUTION:

A crash can damage the restraint systems inyour vehicle. A damaged restraint system maynot properly protect the person using it,resulting in serious injury or even death in acrash. To help make sure your restraintsystems are working properly after a crash,have them inspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon as possible.

If you’ve had a crash, do you need new belts or LATCHsystem parts?

After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.But if the belts were stretched, as they would be ifworn during a more severe crash, then you neednew parts.

If the LATCH system was being used during a moresevere crash, you may need new LATCH system parts.

If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collisiondamage also may mean you will need to have LATCHsystem, safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced.New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the beltor LATCH system wasn’t being used at the time ofthe collision.

If an air bag inflates, you’ll need to replace air bagsystem parts. See the part on the air bag system earlierin this section.

1-62

Keys ...............................................................2-2Remote Keyless Entry System .........................2-3Remote Keyless Entry System Operation ...........2-4

Doors and Locks .............................................2-8Door Locks ....................................................2-8Power Door Locks ..........................................2-9Programmable Automatic Door Locks ................2-9Lockout Protection ........................................2-10Leaving Your Vehicle ....................................2-10Trunk ..........................................................2-10

Windows ........................................................2-13Power Windows ............................................2-14Sun Visors ...................................................2-15

Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-16Content Theft-Deterrent .................................2-16Passlock® ....................................................2-17

Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-18New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-18Ignition Positions ..........................................2-18Starting Your Engine .....................................2-19Engine Coolant Heater ..................................2-22Automatic Transaxle Operation .......................2-23Parking Brake ..............................................2-27Shifting Into Park (P) .....................................2-27

Shifting Out of Park (P) .................................2-30Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-31Engine Exhaust ............................................2-31Running Your Engine While You Are Parked ....2-32

Mirrors ...........................................................2-33Manual Rearview Mirror .................................2-33Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ..............2-33Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror ................2-34Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with

OnStar® ...................................................2-35Outside Power Mirrors ...................................2-36Outside Convex Mirror ...................................2-36

OnStar ® System .............................................2-37HomeLink ® Transmitter ...................................2-39

Programming the HomeLink® Transmitter .........2-39Storage Areas ................................................2-43

Glove Box ...................................................2-43Front Storage Area .......................................2-43Center Console Storage Area .........................2-43Rear Storage Area ........................................2-43Convenience Net ..........................................2-43

Sunroof .........................................................2-44Vehicle Personalization ...................................2-45

Section 2 Features and Controls

2-1

Keys

{CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignitionkey is dangerous for many reasons. A child orothers could be badly injured or even killed.

They could operate the power windows orother controls or even make the vehicle move.

Don’t leave the keys in a vehicle with children.

2-2

One key is used for theignition, the driver’s doorand all other locks.

If you need a new key, contact your dealer forassistance. In an emergency, contact ChevroletRoadside Assistance. See Roadside AssistanceProgram on page 7-5 for more information.

Notice: Your vehicle has a number of featuresthat can help prevent theft. You can have a lot oftrouble getting into your vehicle if you ever lockyour keys inside. You may even have to damageyour vehicle to get in. So be sure you havespare keys.

If your vehicle is equipped with the OnStar® system,with an active subscription and you lock your keys insidethe vehicle, OnStar® may be able to send a commandto unlock your vehicle. See OnStar® System onpage 2-37 for more information.

Remote Keyless Entry SystemThe remote keyless entry system operates on a radiofrequency subject to Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference, and

2. This device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesiredoperation of the device.

This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference, and

2. This device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesiredoperation of the device.

Changes or modifications to this system by other thanan authorized service facility could void authorization touse this equipment.

2-3

At times you may notice a decrease in range. This isnormal for any remote keyless entry system. If thetransmitter does not work or if you have to stand closerto your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:

• Check the distance. You may be too far from yourvehicle. You may need to stand closer duringrainy or snowy weather.

• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects maybe blocking the signal. Take a few steps to theleft or right, hold the transmitter higher, andtry again.

• Check to determine if battery replacement orresynchronization is necessary. See “BatteryReplacement” and “Resynchronization” underRemote Keyless Entry System Operation onpage 2-4.

• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer or aqualified technician for service.

Remote Keyless Entry SystemOperation

Using the remote keylessentry transmitter, you canlock and unlock yourdoors or release your trunkfrom about 3 feet (1 m)up to 30 feet (9 m) away.

LOCK: Press the LOCK button to lock all the doors.

UNLOCK: Press the UNLOCK button once to unlockthe driver’s door and turn on the interior lamps.See “Illumination on Remote Activation” later in thissection for more details. Pause for about one second,then press UNLOCK again to unlock thepassenger door.

2-4

L (Remote Alarm): Press this button to activate analarm. The ignition must be in OFF or ACC for theremote alarm to work. When you press the remotebutton, the headlamps will flash, the horn will soundrepeatedly and your interior lamps will turn on attractingattention if you need it. The alarm will continue untilone of the following occurs:

• The remote alarm button is pressed a second time,

• the vehicle’s ignition is turned to ON or

• an alarm period of 110 seconds has elapsed.

V (Trunk Release): Press the button to releasethe trunk.

Operating the remote keyless entry transmitter mayinteract with the content theft-deterrent system, if yourvehicle has this option. See Content Theft-Deterrenton page 2-16.

Transmitter VerificationThis feature provides feedback that a command hasbeen received by the vehicle. The headlamps andback-up lamps will flash on every lock and on the firstunlock command. The horn will also sound oncefor every lock and twice for the first unlock command.Silent operation and other options may be selectedfor this feature. See Vehicle Personalization onpage 2-45.

If your vehicle has the optional content theft-deterrentsystem, the first time the remote unlock is received,three flashes from the headlamps will be seen and threechirps will be heard to indicate an alarm condition hasoccurred since last arming. See Content Theft-Deterrenton page 2-16.

2-5

Illumination on Remote ActivationThe interior lamps will come on when either theUNLOCK, the trunk release or the remote alarm buttonis pressed. The interior lamps will remain on for40 seconds or until the ignition is turned to ON or LOCKis pressed. Locking the doors with the power doorlocks will also cause the lamps to turn off. If a door isopened during the 40 second period, the interiorlamps will remain on while the door is open.

Matching Transmitter(s) to YourVehicleEach remote keyless entry transmitter is coded toprevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement canbe purchased through your dealer. Remember to bringany remaining transmitters with you when you go toyour dealer. When the dealer matches the replacementtransmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmittersmust also be matched. Once your dealer has coded thenew transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlockyour vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum of fourtransmitters matched to it.

If you prefer, you can complete this procedure yourself.See Vehicle Personalization on page 2-45 for moreinformation.

2-6

Battery ReplacementUnder normal use, the battery in your remote keylessentry transmitter should last about three years.

You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won’twork at the normal range in any location. If you haveto get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,it’s probably time to change the battery.

Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not totouch any of the circuitry. Static from your bodytransferred to these surfaces may damage thetransmitter.

To replace the battery do the following:

1. Insert a flat object like a coin into the slot on theback of the transmitter. Gently pry apart the frontand back.

2. Gently pry the battery out of the transmitter. Do notuse a metal object.

3. Put the new battery into the transmitter as shownon the transmitter. Use type CR2032 battery orequivalent.

4. Put the two halves back together. Make sure thehalves are together tightly so water won’t get in.

5. Resynchronize and then test the transmitter.

ResynchronizationAfter you have changed the battery in your transmitter,you will need to resynchronize the transmitter. Todo this, press the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on thetransmitter at the same time and hold for aboutseven seconds or until one horn chirp is heard.

2-7

Doors and Locks

Door Locks

{CAUTION:

Unlocked doors can be dangerous.• Passengers — especially children — can

easily open the doors and fall out of amoving vehicle. When a door is locked, thehandle won’t open it. You increase thechance of being thrown out of the vehiclein a crash if the doors aren’t locked. So,wear safety belts properly and lock thedoors whenever you drive.

• Young children who get into unlockedvehicles may be unable to get out. A childcan be overcome by extreme heat and cansuffer permanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke. Always lock your vehiclewhenever you leave it.

• Outsiders can easily enter through anunlocked door when you slow down orstop your vehicle. Locking your doors canhelp prevent this from happening.

There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.

From the outside, use your key or remote keylessentry transmitter. From the inside, use the manual orpower door locks.

To unlock the driver’s side door from the outside withthe key, insert the key and turn it toward the front of thevehicle. To lock the driver’s side door from the outsidewith your key, insert the key and turn it toward therear of the vehicle.

To lock the door from the inside, push the manual locklever forward. To unlock the door, pull the leverrearward.

2-8

Power Door Locks

A power door lock switchis located on each frontdoor above the armrest.

Press the top of the switch to unlock all doors, or pressthe bottom part of the switch to lock all doors.

The rear doors do not have power door lock switches.The manual lever on each rear door works only thatdoor’s lock.

If your vehicle has the optional content theft-deterrentsystem and it is armed, the power door lock switches willbe disabled. You must use your remote keyless entrytransmitter or your key to unlock the doors whenthe system is armed.

Programmable Automatic DoorLocksProgrammable automatic power door locks are astandard feature that is intended to provide enhancedsecurity and convenience by automatically lockingand unlocking doors.

Programmable Modes

Mode 1: No automatic door lock or unlock.

Mode 2: Automatic all-door lock when the transaxle isshifted out of PARK (P); no automatic door unlock.

Mode 3: Automatic all-door lock when the transaxle isshifted out of PARK (P); automatic unlock for thedriver’s door only when the transaxle is shifted intoPARK (P).

Mode 4: Automatic all-door lock when the transaxle isshifted out of PARK (P); automatic all-door unlockwhen the transaxle is shifted into PARK (P).

Your vehicle was originally programmed to Mode 4. Themode may have been changed since then. Todetermine the current mode, or to change the mode,see Vehicle Personalization on page 2-45.

2-9

Disconnecting the battery for up to a year will notchange the programmed mode of the programmableautomatic power door locks.

Lockout ProtectionTo protect you from locking your key in the vehicle, thisfeature stops the power door locks from locking whilethe key is in the ignition and a door is open.

If a power lock switch is pressed while a door is openand the key is in the ignition, all of the doors willlock and then the driver’s door will unlock. A chime willsound continuously until all doors are closed.

Leaving Your VehicleIf you are leaving the vehicle, take your keys, open yourdoor and set the locks from inside. Then get out andclose the door.

Trunk

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk lidopen because carbon monoxide (CO) gas cancome into your vehicle. You can’t see or smellCO. It can cause unconsciousness and evendeath. If you must drive with the trunk lid openor if electrical wiring or other cableconnections must pass through the sealbetween the body and the trunk lid:

• Make sure all other windows are shut.• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling

system to its highest speed and select thecontrol setting that will force outside airinto your vehicle. See “Climate ControlSystem” in the Index.

• If you have air outlets on or under theinstrument panel, open them all the way.

See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index.

2-10

Trunk LockTo unlock the trunk from the outside, insert the key inthe lock and turn it. You can also press the carsymbol on your remote keyless entry transmitter, ifequipped.

Remote Trunk ReleaseYou can also unlock the trunk from inside the vehicle.

Press the button locatedbelow the exterior lampscontrol on the underside ofthe dashboard. The shiftlever must be in PARK (P)for the remote trunkrelease button to work.

Trunk Assist Handle

There is an assist handlelocated on the inside ofthe trunk lid towardthe driver’s side of thevehicle.

Pull down on the handle to lower the trunk lid. Thenclose the trunk with your other hand. If the trunk is notproperly closed, the TRUNK OPEN message willappear in the message center of your instrument panelcluster. See Trunk Ajar Warning Message onpage 3-45 for more information.

Notice: The trunk assist handle is not designed tobe used to tie down the trunk lid or as an anchorpoint when securing items in the trunk. Improperuse of the trunk assist handle could damage it.

2-11

Emergency Trunk Release Handle There is a glow-in-the-dark trunk release handle locatedinside the trunk on the latch. This handle will glowfollowing exposure to light. Pull the release handle up toopen the trunk from the inside.

Notice: The emergency trunk release handle is notdesigned to be used to tie down the trunk lid oras an anchor point when securing items in the trunk.Improper use of the emergency trunk releasehandle could damage it.

2-12

Windows

{CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with the windowsclosed is dangerous. A child can be overcomeby the extreme heat and can suffer permanentinjuries or even death from heat stroke. Neverleave a child alone in a vehicle, especially withthe windows closed in warm or hot weather.

2-13

Power Windows

If your vehicle has power windows, switches located onthe driver’s door armrest control each of the windows.

In addition, each passenger’s door has a window switchthat controls that door’s window. To operate eachwindow, press the switch forward to close the windowand rearward to open it.

Express-Down WindowThe driver’s window switch has an express-downfeature. This switch is labeled AUTO. Tap the rear ofthe switch, and the driver’s window will open asmall amount. If the rear of the switch is fully pressed,the window will go all the way down.

To stop the window while it is lowering, press the frontof the switch. To raise the window, press and holdthe front of the switch.

2-14

Window Lock OutThe driver’s window controls also include a lock outswitch. Press the window lock switch to the right to stoprear passengers from using their window switches.The driver can still control all the windows with the lockon. Press the switch to the left to return to normalwindow operation.

Sun VisorsTo block out glare, you can swing down the visors.You can also move them from side to side. The visorsalso have extenders that you can pull out foradded coverage.

Visor Vanity MirrorsOpen the cover on the top of the sun visor to exposethe vanity mirror.

If your vehicle has the lighted vanity mirrors, the lampscome on when you open the cover.

2-15

Theft-Deterrent SystemsVehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrentfeatures, we know that nothing we put on it can make itimpossible to steal.

Content Theft-DeterrentYour vehicle may have the optional contenttheft-deterrent alarm system.

With this system, a light on the radio will flash.

This light reminds you to activate the theft-deterrentsystem. Here’s how to do it:

1. Open the door.

2. Lock the door with the power door lock switch orthe remote keyless entry transmitter. The light onthe radio should come on and stay on. If youare using the remote keyless entry transmitter, thedoor does not need to be open.

3. Close all doors. The light on the radio will slowlyflash once the system is armed.

Once armed, the alarm will go off if someone tries toenter the vehicle (without using the remote keyless entrytransmitter or a key) or turns the ignition on with an

incorrect key. The horn will sound and the headlampsand back-up lamps will flash for approximatelytwo minutes.

When the alarm is armed, the trunk may be openedwith the remote keyless entry transmitter. If you use thekey to open the trunk, the alarm will sound. Thepower door lock switches are also disabled. You mustuse your remote keyless entry transmitter or your key tounlock the doors when the system is armed.

Arming with the Power Lock SwitchYour alarm system will arm when you use either powerlock switch to lock the doors while any door or thetrunk is open and the key is removed from the ignition.

The light on the radio flashes quickly to let you knowwhen the system is ready to arm with the powerdoor lock switches. The light on the radio will stopflashing and stay on when you press the bottom of thepower lock switch, to let you know the system isarming. After all doors and the trunk are closed andlocked, the light on the radio will flash slowly to let youknow the system is armed.

2-16

Arming with the Remote Keyless EntryTransmitterYour alarm system will arm when you use your remotekeyless entry transmitter to lock the doors, if the keyis not in the ignition. The light on the radio will turn on tolet you know the system is arming. After all doors andthe trunk are closed and locked, the light on theradio will begin flashing at a very slow rate to let youknow the system is armed.

Disarming with the Remote KeylessEntry TransmitterYour alarm system will disarm when you use yourremote keyless entry transmitter to unlock the doors.The light on the radio will go off to let you knowthe system is no longer armed.

The first time a remote UNLOCK command is received,three flashes will be seen and three horn chirpsheard to indicate an alarm condition has occurred sincelast arming.

Disarming with Your KeyYour alarm system will disarm when you use your keyto unlock the doors. The light on the radio will gooff to let you know the system is no longer armed.

Passlock ®

Your vehicle is equipped with the Passlock®

theft-deterrent system.

Passlock® is a passive theft-deterrent system. Passlock®

enables fuel if the ignition lock cylinder is turned witha valid key. If a correct key is not used or the ignitionlock cylinder is tampered with, fuel is disabled andthe engine will not start.

During normal operation, the SECURITY message willbe displayed after the key is turned to the ON ignitionposition. See Security Message on page 3-46.

If the engine stalls and the SECURITY messageflashes, wait until the light stops flashing before trying torestart the engine.

If the engine is running and the SECURITY messagecomes on, you will be able to restart the engine ifyou turn the engine off. However, your Passlock®

system is not working properly and must be serviced byyour dealer. Your vehicle is not protected by Passlock®

at this time. You may also want to check the fuse.See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-95. See yourdealer for service.

In an emergency, contact Chevrolet RoadsideAssistance. See Roadside Assistance Program onpage 7-5 for more information.

2-17

Starting and Operating YourVehicle

New Vehicle Break-InNotice: Your vehicle doesn’t need an elaborate“break-in.” But it will perform better in the long runif you follow these guidelines:

• Don’t drive at any one speed — fast or slow —for the first 500 miles (805 km). Don’t make

full-throttle starts.

• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles(322 km) or so. During this time your newbrake linings aren’t yet broken in. Hard stopswith new linings can mean premature wear andearlier replacement. Follow this breaking-inguideline every time you get new brake linings.

• Don’t tow a trailer during break-in. See “Towinga Trailer” in the Index for more information.

Ignition PositionsWith the key in the ignition, you can turn the switch tofour positions.

The ignition switch islocated on the instrumentpanel, to the right ofthe steering column.

OFF: This is the only position from which you canremove the key. Removing the key locks your ignitionand automatic transaxle.

Notice: If your key seems stuck in OFF and youcan’t turn it, be sure you are using the correct key;if so, is it all the way in? Turn the key only withyour hand. Using a tool to force it could break thekey or the ignition switch. If none of this works, thenyour vehicle needs service.

2-18

ACC (ACCESSORY): This is the position in which youcan operate your electrical accessories. With the keyin this position, the ignition and automatic transaxlewill unlock.

ON: This is the position to which the switch returnsafter you start the engine and release the switch. Theswitch stays in ON while the engine is running. Buteven when the engine is not running, you can use ONto operate your electrical accessories and to displaysome instrument panel cluster messages andwarning lights.

START: This position starts the engine. When theengine starts, release the key. The ignition switch willreturn to ON for normal driving.

While the engine is not running, ACC and ON allowyou to operate your electrical accessories, such asthe radio.

A warning chime will sound if you open the driver’s doorwhile the ignition is in OFF or ACC and the key is inthe ignition.

Retained Accessory Power (RAP)With Retained Accessory Power (RAP), your powerwindows, audio system and sunroof (option) willcontinue to work for up to 10 minutes after the ignition isturned to OFF and none of the doors is opened.

Starting Your EngineMove your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).Your engine won’t start in any other position — that’s asafety feature. To restart when you’re already moving,use NEUTRAL (N) only.

Notice: Don’t try to shift to PARK (P) if yourvehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage thetransaxle. Shift to PARK (P) only when yourvehicle is stopped.

2-19

Starting Your 3400 V6 Engine1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn your

ignition key to START. When the engine starts, letgo of the key. The idle speed will go down asyour engine warms up.

Notice: Holding your key in START for longer than15 seconds at a time will cause your battery tobe drained much sooner. And the excessive heatcan damage your starter motor. Wait about 15seconds between each try to help avoid drainingyour battery or damaging your starter.

2. If the engine doesn’t start in 10 seconds, push theaccelerator pedal about one-quarter of the waydown while you turn the key to START. Do this untilthe engine starts. As soon as it does, let go ofthe key.

3. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but thenstops), it could be flooded with too much gasoline.Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to thefloor and holding it there as you hold the key inSTART for a maximum of 15 seconds. This clearsthe extra gasoline from the engine. If the enginestill won’t start or starts briefly but then stops again,repeat Step 1 or 2, depending on temperature.When the engine starts, release the key and theaccelerator pedal.

Notice: Your engine is designed to work with theelectronics in your vehicle. If you add electricalparts or accessories, you could change the way theengine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,check with your dealer. If you don’t, your enginemight not perform properly.

2-20

Starting Your 3800 Series II V6 Engine1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn

your ignition key to START. When the engine starts,let go of the key. The idle speed will go down asyour engine gets warm.

Notice: Holding your key in START for longer than15 seconds at a time will cause your battery tobe drained much sooner. And the excessive heatcan damage your starter motor. Wait about 15seconds between each try to help avoid drainingyour battery or damaging your starter.

2. If it doesn’t start within 10 seconds, hold your key inSTART for about 10 seconds at a time until yourengine starts. Wait about 15 seconds between eachtry.

3. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but thenstops), it could be flooded with too much gasoline.Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to thefloor and holding it there as you hold the key inSTART for about three seconds. If the vehicle startsbriefly but then stops again, do the same thing.This time keep the pedal down for five or sixseconds to clear the extra gasoline from the engine.After waiting about 15 seconds, repeat the normalstarting procedure.

Notice: Your engine is designed to work with theelectronics in your vehicle. If you add electricalparts or accessories, you could change the way theengine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,check with your dealer. If you don’t, your enginemight not perform properly.

2-21

Engine Coolant Heater

Your vehicle may be equipped with this feature. In verycold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder, the enginecoolant heater can help. You’ll get easier starting andbetter fuel economy during engine warm-up. Usually,the coolant heater should be plugged in a minimumof four hours prior to starting your vehicle. Attemperatures above 32°F (0°C), use of the coolantheater is not required.

To Use the Engine Coolant Heater1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. Thecord is attached to the underside of the diagonalbrace, which is located above the engine aircleaner/filter assembly.

3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.

{CAUTION:

Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outletcould cause an electrical shock. Also, thewrong kind of extension cord could overheatand cause a fire. You could be seriouslyinjured. Plug the cord into a properly groundedthree-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cordwon’t reach, use a heavy-duty three-prongextension cord rated for at least 15 amps.

2-22

4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug andstore the cord as it was before to keep it awayfrom moving engine parts. If you don’t, it could bedamaged.

How long should you keep the coolant heater pluggedin? The answer depends on the outside temperature, thekind of oil you have, and some other things. Insteadof trying to list everything here, we ask that you contactyour dealer in the area where you’ll be parking yourvehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice for thatparticular area.

Automatic Transaxle Operation

Your automatic transaxle may have a shift lever on thesteering column or on the console between theseats.

Console Shift Lever

2-23

There is also a display, like the graphic above, locatedon the instrument panel cluster that will indicate thegear the vehicle is in.

Maximum engine speed is limited on automatic transaxlevehicles while you’re in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) toprotect driveline components from improper operation.

There are several different positions for your shift lever.

PARK (P): This position locks your front wheels. It’sthe best position to use when you start your enginebecause your vehicle can’t move easily.

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicleif the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) withthe parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle canroll. If you have left the engine running, thevehicle can move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure your vehicle won’tmove, even when you’re on fairly level ground,use the steps that follow. If you’re pulling atrailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index.

Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) beforestarting the engine. Your vehicle has an automatictransaxle shift lock control system. You must fully applyyour regular brakes before you can shift from PARK (P)while the ignition is in ON. If you cannot shift out ofPARK (P), ease pressure on the shift lever by pushing itall the way into PARK (P) while keeping the brakepedal pushed down. Release the shift lever button if youhave a console shift. Then move the shift lever out ofPARK (P). See Shifting Out of Park (P) on page 2-30.

2-24

REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.

Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicleis moving forward could damage your transaxle.Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicleis stopped.

To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,ice or sand without damaging your transaxle, see IfYou Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow onpage 4-30.

NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesn’tconnect with the wheels. To restart when you’re alreadymoving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, useNEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.

{CAUTION:

Shifting into a drive gear while your engine is“racing” (running at high speed) is dangerous.Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal,your vehicle could move very rapidly. Youcould lose control and hit people or objects.Don’t shift into a drive gear while your engineis racing.

Notice: Damage to your transaxle caused byshifting into a drive gear with the engine running athigh speed isn’t covered by your warranty.

AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (X): This position is fornormal driving. If you need more power for passing, andyou’re:

• Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push youraccelerator pedal about halfway down.

• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push theaccelerator pedal all the way down.

You’ll shift down to the next gear and have more power.

Notice: If your vehicle seems to start up ratherslowly, or if it seems not to shift gears as you gofaster, something may be wrong with a transaxlesystem sensor. If you drive very far that way, yourvehicle can be damaged. So, if this happens,have your vehicle serviced right away. Until then,you can use SECOND (2) when you are driving lessthan 35 mph (55 km/h) and AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE(D) for higher speeds.

2-25

THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal driving,but it offers more power and lower fuel economy thanAUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (X).

Here are some times you might choose THIRD (3)instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (X):

• When driving on hilly, winding roads.

• When towing a trailer, so there is less shiftingbetween gears.

• When going down a steep hill.

• When driving in non-highway scenarios (i.e. citystreets, etc.).

SECOND (2): This position gives you more power butlower fuel economy than THIRD (3). You can useSECOND (2) on hills. It can help control your speed asyou go down steep mountain roads, but then youwould also want to use your brakes off and on.

Notice: Don’t drive in SECOND (2) for more than 25miles (40 km), or at speeds over 55 mph (90 km/h),or you can damage your transaxle. Use THIRD (3) orAUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D) as much as possible.Don’t shift into SECOND (2) unless you are goingslower than 65 mph (105 km/h) or you can damageyour engine.

FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power,but lower fuel economy than SECOND (2). You can useit on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If theshift lever is in FIRST (1), the transaxle won’t shift intofirst gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough.

Notice: If your front wheels won’t turn, don’t try todrive. This might happen if you were stuck invery deep sand or mud or were up against a solidobject. You could damage your transaxle. Also,if you stop when going uphill, don’t hold yourvehicle there with only the accelerator pedal. Thiscould overheat and damage the transaxle. Use yourbrakes to hold your vehicle in position on a hill.

2-26

Parking Brake

The parking brake islocated to the left of thebrake pedal, near thedriver’s door.

To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedal downwith your right foot. Push down the parking brake pedalwith your left foot.

To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedaldown with your right foot and push the parking brakepedal with your left foot. When you lift your left foot, theparking brake pedal will follow it to the releasedposition.

A warning chime will sound if the parking brake is set,the ignition is on and the shift lever is not in PARK (P).

Notice: Driving with the parking brake on cancause your rear brakes to overheat. You may haveto replace them, and you could also damageother parts of your vehicle.If you are towing a trailer and parking on any hill, seeTowing a Trailer on page 4-34. That section shows whatto do first to keep the trailer from moving.

Shifting Into Park (P)

{CAUTION:

It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if theshift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with theparking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine isrunning unless you have to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured. Tobe sure your vehicle won’t move, even whenyou’re on fairly level ground, always set yourparking brake and move the shift lever toPARK (P). See “Shifting Into Park (P)” in theIndex. If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing aTrailer” in the Index.

2-27

Steering Column Shift Lever1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and

set the parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) like this:

• Pull the lever toward you.

• Move the lever up as far as it will go.

3. Turn the ignition key to OFF.

4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you canleave your vehicle with the ignition key in yourhand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).

2-28

Console Shift Lever1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and

set the parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) like this:

• Hold in the button on the shift lever.

• Push the lever all the way toward the front ofyour vehicle.

3. Turn the ignition key to OFF.

4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you canleave your vehicle with the ignition key in yourhand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).

Leaving Your Vehicle With the EngineRunning

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle withthe engine running. Your vehicle could movesuddenly if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.And, if you leave the vehicle with the enginerunning, it could overheat and even catch fire.You or others could be injured. Don’t leaveyour vehicle with the engine running.

If you have to leave your vehicle with the enginerunning, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and yourparking brake is firmly set before you leave it. Afteryou’ve moved the shift lever into the PARK (P) position,hold the regular brake pedal down. Then, see if youcan move the shift lever away from PARK (P) withoutfirst pulling it toward you or if you have the console shiftlever, without first pushing the button. If you can, itmeans that the shift lever wasn’t fully locked intoPARK (P).

2-29

Torque LockIf you are parking on a hill and you don’t shift yourtransaxle into PARK (P) properly, the weight ofthe vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawlin the transaxle. You may find it difficult to pull theshift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.”To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake andthen shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave thedriver’s seat. To find out how, see Shifting Into Park (P)on page 2-27.

When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out ofPARK (P) before you release the parking brake.

If torque lock does occur, you may need to have anothervehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of thepressure from the parking pawl in the transaxle, so youcan pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).

Shifting Out of Park (P)Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift lockcontrol system. You must fully apply your regular brakesbefore you can shift from PARK (P) when the ignitionis in ON. See Automatic Transaxle Operation onpage 2-23.

If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure onthe shift lever by pushing it all the way into PARK (P)while keeping the brake pedal pushed down. Releasethe shift lever button if you have a console shift.Then move the shift lever out of PARK (P), being sureto press the shift lever button if you have a console shift.

If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can’tshift out of PARK (P), try this:

1. Turn the ignition key to ACC.

2. Apply and hold the brake pedal down until the endof Step 4.

3. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).

4. Start the engine and shift to the drive gearyou want.

5. Have the vehicle fixed as soon as you can.

2-30

Parking Over Things That Burn

{CAUTION:

Things that can burn could touch hot exhaustparts under your vehicle and ignite. Don’t parkover papers, leaves, dry grass or other thingsthat can burn.

Engine Exhaust

{CAUTION:

Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gascarbon monoxide (CO), which you can’t see orsmell. It can cause unconsciousness anddeath.

You might have exhaust coming in if:• Your exhaust system sounds strange or

different.• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.• Your vehicle was damaged when driving

over high points on the road or over roaddebris.

• Repairs weren’t done correctly.• Your vehicle or exhaust system had been

modified improperly.

If you ever suspect exhaust is coming intoyour vehicle:

• Drive it only with all the windows down toblow out any CO; and

• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.

2-31

Running Your Engine While YouAre ParkedIt’s better not to park with the engine running. But if youever have to, here are some things to know.

{CAUTION:

Idling the engine with the climate controlsystem off could allow dangerous exhaust intoyour vehicle. See the earlier Caution under“Engine Exhaust.”

Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadlycarbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even ifthe climate control fan is at the highest setting.One place this can happen is a garage.Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.NEVER park in a garage with the enginerunning.

Another closed-in place can be a blizzard. See“Winter Driving” in the Index.

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicleif the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) withthe parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle canroll. Don’t leave your vehicle when the engineis running unless you have to. If you’ve left theengine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured. Tobe sure your vehicle won’t move, even whenyou’re on fairly level ground, always set yourparking brake and move the shift lever toPARK (P).

Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won’tmove. See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-27.

If you are parking on a hill and if you’re pulling a trailer,also see Towing a Trailer on page 4-34.

2-32

Mirrors

Manual Rearview MirrorAdjust all the mirrors so you can see clearly when youare sitting in a comfortable driving position.

To reduce glare from headlamps behind you, pull thelever at the bottom of the mirror toward you (to the nightposition). To return the mirror back to the day position,push the lever away from you.

There are two lamps located on the bottom of themirror. Press the button next to each lamp to turn it onand off.

Manual Rearview Mirror withOnStar ®

If your vehicle has this feature, this mirror has a leverlocated at the bottom of the mirror between the twolamps. It is used to change the mirror from day to nightposition. To reduce glare from headlamps behindyou while driving at night, pull the lever toward you. Toreturn the mirror to the day position, return the leverto its original position.

There are two map lamps located on the bottom of themirror. Press the button next to each lamp to turn iton and off.

There are also three OnStar® buttons located at thebottom of the mirror face. See your dealer for moreinformation on the system and how to subscribeto OnStar®. See OnStar® System on page 2-37 formore information about the services OnStar® provides.

2-33

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror

Your vehicle may be equipped with an automaticdimming rearview mirror. Push the center button belowthe mirror to turn this feature on. The mirror willdarken gradually to reduce glare from headlamps behindyou. This may take a few moments. The mirror willlighten whenever you shift to REVERSE (R).


One photocell on the front of the mirror senses when itis becoming dark outside. Another photocell, facingrearward, senses headlamps behind you. To turn theautomatic dimming feature off, press the centerbutton again.

To keep the photocells operating well, occasionallyclean them with a cotton swab and glass cleaner.

2-34

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirrorwith OnStar ®

Your vehicle may be equipped with an automaticdimming rearview mirror with the OnStar® System.

Press the button located below the mirror, on the far left,for up to three seconds to turn the automatic dimmingfeature off and on. While turned on, this mirror functionsexactly like the automatic dimming mirror describedpreviously.


There are also three OnStar® buttons located at thebottom of the mirror. See your dealer for moreinformation on the system and how to subscribe toOnStar®. See OnStar® System on page 2-37 for moreinformation about the service OnStar® provides.

2-35

Outside Power Mirrors

The outside power mirrorcontrols are located nearthe driver’s side window,on the armrest.

Use the selector switch located above the four-waycontrol panel to choose either the left or right outsidemirror. Then press any of the four arrows locatedon the control pad to move each mirror in thedesired direction.

Adjust each mirror so you can see the side of yourvehicle and the area beside and behind your vehicle.

Heated Outside MirrorsIf your vehicle has this feature, the surface of theoutside mirrors will heat when the rear window defoggeris activated.

Outside Convex MirrorYour passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convexmirror’s surface is curved so you can see more from thedriver’s seat.

{CAUTION:

A convex mirror can make things (like othervehicles) look farther away than they really are.If you cut too sharply into the right lane, youcould hit a vehicle on your right. Check yourinside mirror or glance over your shoulderbefore changing lanes.

2-36

OnStar ® System

OnStar® uses global positioning system (GPS) satellitetechnology, wireless communications, and call centersto provide you with a wide range of safety, security,information and convenience services.

A complete OnStar® user’s guide and the terms andconditions of the OnStar® Subscription ServiceAgreement are included in your vehicle’s glove boxliterature. For more information, visit www.onstar.com,contact OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827),or press the blue OnStar® button to speak to anOnStar® advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.

A completed Subscription Service Agreement is requiredprior to delivery of OnStar® services and prepaidcalling minutes are also required for OnStar® PersonalCalling and OnStar® Virtual Advisor use. Terms andconditions of the Subscription Service Agreement can befound at www.onstar.com.

OnStar ® ServicesOne of the following plans is normally included for aspecific duration with each vehicle equipped withOnStar®. You can upgrade or extend your OnStar®

service plan to meet your needs.

Safe and Sound Plan• Automatic Notification of Air Bag Deployment

• Emergency Services

• Roadside Assistance

• Stolen Vehicle Assistance

• AccidentAssist

• Remote Door Unlock

• Remote Diagnostics

• Online Concierge

2-37

Directions and Connections Plan• All Safe and Sound Plan services

• Route Support

• RideAssist

• Information and Convenience Services

Luxury and Leisure Plan• All Directions and Connections Plan services

• Personal Concierge

OnStar ® Personal CallingWith OnStar® Personal Calling, you have a safer way tostay connected while driving. It’s a hands-free wirelessphone that’s integrated into your vehicle. You can placecalls nationwide using voice-activated dialing with nocontracts and no additional roaming charges. To find outmore about OnStar® Personal Calling, refer to theOnStar® user’s guide in your vehicle’s glove box, or callOnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).

OnStar ® Virtual AdvisorWith OnStar® Virtual Advisor you can listen to the news,entertainment and informative topics, such as trafficand weather reports. You are able to listen and reply toyour e-mail through your vehicle’s speakers.

2-38

HomeLink ® Transmitter

HomeLink®, a combined universal transmitter andreceiver, provides a way to replace up to threehand-held transmitters used to activate devices such asgate operators, garage door openers, entry doorlocks, security systems and home lighting. AdditionalHomeLink® information can be found on the internet atwww.homelink.com or by calling 1-800-355-3515.

If your vehicle is equipped with the HomeLink®

Transmitter, it complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesiredoperation.

This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) thisdevice must accept any interference, includinginterference that may cause undesired operation of thedevice.

Changes and modifications to this system by other thanan authorized service facility could void authorizationto use this equipment.

Programming the HomeLink ®

TransmitterDo not use the HomeLink® Transmitter with any garagedoor opener that does not have the “stop and reverse”feature. This includes any garage door opener modelmanufactured before April 1, 1982. If you have a newergarage door opener with rolling codes, please besure to follow steps 6 through 8 to complete theprogramming of your HomeLink® Transmitter.

Read the instructions completely before attempting toprogram the HomeLink® Transmitter. Because ofthe steps involved, it may be helpful to have anotherperson available to assist you in programmingthe transmitter.

2-39

Keep the original transmitter for use in other vehicles aswell as for future HomeLink® programming. It is alsorecommended that upon the sale of the vehicle,the programmed HomeLink® buttons should be erasedfor security purposes. Refer to “Erasing HomeLink®

Buttons” or, for assistance, contact HomeLink® on theinternet at: www.homelink.com or by calling1-800-355-3515.

Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garagedoor or gate operator you are programming. Whenprogramming a garage door, it is advised to park outsideof the garage.

It is recommended that a new battery be installed inyour hand-held transmitter for quicker and moreaccurate transmission of the radio frequency.

Your vehicle’s engine should be turned off whileprogramming the transmitter. Follow these steps toprogram up to three channels:

1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons,releasing only when the indicator light begins toflash, after 20 seconds. Do not hold down thebuttons for longer than 30 seconds and do notrepeat this step to program a second and/or thirdtransmitter to the remaining two HomeLink® buttons.

2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter about1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink®

buttons while keeping the indicator light in view.

3. Simultaneously press and hold both the desiredbutton on HomeLink® and the hand-held transmitterbutton. Do not release the buttons until Step 4has been completed.Some entry gates and garage door openers mayrequire you to substitute Step 3 with the procedurenoted in “Gate Operator and CanadianProgramming” later in this section.

4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first and thenrapidly after HomeLink® successfully receives thefrequency signal from the hand-held transmitter.Release both buttons.

5. Press and hold the newly-trained HomeLink® buttonand observe the indicator light.If the indicator light stays on constantly,programming is complete and your device shouldactivate when the HomeLink® button is pressedand released.To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,begin with Step 2 under “Programming HomeLink®.”Do not repeat Step 1 as this will erase all of theprogrammed channels.If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two secondsand then turns to a constant light, continue withSteps 6 through 8 following to complete theprogramming of a rolling-code equipped device(most commonly, a garage door opener).

2-40

6. Locate in the garage, the garage door openerreceiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”or “Smart” button. This can usually be found wherethe hanging antenna wire is attached to themotor-head unit.

7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or “Smart”button. The name and color of the button mayvary by manufacturer.You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8.

8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and hold theprogrammed HomeLink® button for two seconds,then release. Repeat the press/hold/releasesequence a second time, and depending on thebrand of the garage door opener (or other rollingcode device), repeat this sequence a third timeto complete the programming.HomeLink® should now activate your rolling-codeequipped device.

To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,begin with Step 2 of “Programming HomeLink®.” Do notrepeat Step 1.

Gate Operator and CanadianProgrammingCanadian radio-frequency laws require transmittersignals to “time out” or quit after several seconds oftransmission. This may not be long enough forHomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming.Similarly, some U.S. gate operators are manufactured to“time out” in the same manner.

If you live in Canada, or you are having difficultyprogramming a gate operator by using the“Programming HomeLink®” procedures (regardless ofwhere you live), replace Step 3 under “ProgrammingHomeLink®” with the following:

Continue to press and hold the HomeLink® button whileyou press and release every two seconds (cycle)your hand-held transmitter until the frequency signal hasbeen successfully accepted by HomeLink®. Theindicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.Proceed with Step 4 under “Programming HomeLink®”to complete.

2-41

Using HomeLink ®

Press and hold the appropriate HomeLink® button for atleast half of a second. The indicator light will comeon while the signal is being transmitted.

Erasing HomeLink ® ButtonsTo erase programming from the three buttons do thefollowing:

1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons untilthe indicator light begins to flash, after 20 seconds.

2. Release both buttons. Do not hold for longer than30 seconds.

HomeLink® is now in the train (learning) mode and canbe programmed at any time beginning with Step 2under “Programming HomeLink®.”

Individual buttons can not be erased, but they can bereprogrammed. See “Reprogramming a SingleHomeLink® Button” next.

Reprogramming a Single HomeLink ®

ButtonTo program a device to HomeLink® using a HomeLink®

button previously trained, follow these steps:

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button. Donot release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to flash after20 seconds. While still holding the HomeLink®

button, proceed with Step 2 under “ProgrammingHomeLink®.”

Resetting DefaultsTo reset HomeLink® to default settings do the following:

1. Hold down the two outside buttons for about20 seconds until the indicator light begins to flash.

2. Continue to hold both buttons until the HomeLink®

indicator light turns off.

3. Release both buttons.

For questions or comments, contact HomeLink® at1-800-355-3515, or on the internet atwww.homelink.com.

2-42

Storage Areas

Glove BoxUse the key to lock and unlock the glove box. To open,lift the latch.

Front Storage AreaIf your vehicle has the split bench front seat, there is anarmrest located in the center of the seat. Dualcupholders are located in front of the armrest.

Center Console Storage AreaYour vehicle may be equipped with a center console. Ithas cupholders, a cassette tape and CD storagearea. To open the console’s storage area, pull up on thelatch located in the front of the console lid.

Rear Storage AreaIf your vehicle has the split folding rear seat, there willbe two cupholders in the rear seat armrest. Toaccess them, pull down on the cloth strap locatedtoward the top of your center back seat cushion.

Convenience NetYour vehicle may have a convenience net. You’ll see iton the back wall of the trunk.

Put small loads, like grocery bags, behind or inside thenet. It can help keep them from falling over duringsharp turns or quick starts and stops.

The net isn’t for larger, heavier loads. Store those in thetrunk as far forward as you can.

You can unhook the net so that it will lie flat whenyou’re not using it.

2-43

SunroofYour vehicle may have an express-open sunroof. Itincludes a sliding and tilting glass panel and asunshade.

The switch is located on the overhead console if thevehicle is equipped with a Driver Information Center(DIC). If the vehicle is not equipped with a DIC,the sunroof switch is located on the roof panel headliner.

To open the powersunroof, press the switchto the rear twice andthe sunroof will open.

The switch works only when the ignition is in ACC, ONor when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active.

Open/Express: To activate the express-open feature,press the switch rearward. You can stop the sunroofbefore it is completely open by pushing the switchforward.

Vent: Your sunroof also has a vent feature. It can beactivated from the closed sunroof position by pressingthe switch once rearward. To close, push and holdthe sunroof switch forward. When using this feature, thesunshade should be fully opened in the rear position.

The sunshade can be opened manually by slidingit rearward, or automatically, by opening the powersunroof. You will need to close the sunshade manuallyby sliding it forward.

Close: To close the sunroof, push the switch forwardand hold until the sunroof motor stops, or releasethe switch when the desired position has been reached.

DIC Version Shown

2-44

Vehicle PersonalizationSome of the convenience features can be reset orcustomized to perform according to your preference.Features you can program depend upon the options thatcame with your vehicle. The following list showsfeatures that can be reset or customized along with theoptions.

• Settings (Available for All)

• GM Oil Life System Reset (Available for All)

• Low Tire Pressure Reset (If Equipped)

• Delayed Headlamp Illumination (Available for All)

• Automatic Door Lock and Unlock (Available for All)

• Remote Visual Verification (Available with RemoteKeyless Entry)

• Remote Audible Verification (Available with RemoteKeyless Entry)

• Content Theft Operation (Optional with ContentTheft System)

• Trunk Jamb (Optional with Content Theft System)

• Horn Chirp On Timer (Available with RemoteKeyless Entry)

• Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter Programming(Available with Remote Keyless Entry)

• Return to Original Factory Settings (Availablefor All)

• Exit Vehicle Customization Mode

Programmable ModesTo reset or customize the features, first enter thevehicle customization main menu. To enter the mainmenu, do the following:

1. Turn the ignition to ACC or ON. The radio must beoff.

2. Press and hold the TUNE or DISP knob on theradio for at least five seconds until SETTINGS isdisplayed.

3. Press the SEEK or PSCAN up or down arrows toscroll through each available feature on your mainmenu.

4. Press the PREV or NEXT buttons to scroll throughthe lower menu. An asterisk (*) will appear next tothe item that is the current setting.

The following information shows how to reset orcustomize features after entering the main menu.

SETTINGS (Display Current Settings)This feature displays your vehicle personalizationsettings.

2-45

OIL LIFE (GM Oil Life System Reset)This feature allows you to reset the GM Oil Life SystemMonitor after an oil change, see Engine Oil onpage 5-16. Be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE at anytime other than when the oil has been changed. To clearthe CHANGE ENGINE OIL light from the instrumentpanel cluster and reset the oil life monitor:

1. Scroll, using the SEEK/PSCAN up or down arrows,until OIL LIFE appears on the display.

2. Press the PREV or NEXT button to enter thesubmenu. RESET will then be displayed.

3. Press the TUNE/DISP knob to reset. A chime willbe heard to verify the new setting and DONE willbe displayed for one second.

The CHANGE ENGINE OIL light is now reset. You caneither exit the programming mode by following theinstructions later in this section or program the nextfeature available on your vehicle.

TIRE MON (Tire Inflation MonitorReset)This feature allows you to reset the tire pressuremonitor after checking all tire pressures, see Tires onpage 5-61. To clear the LOW TIRE PRESSURElight from the instrument panel cluster and reset the lowtire pressure monitor do the following:

1. Scroll, using the SEEK/PSCAN up or down arrows,until TIRE MON appears on the display.

2. Press the PREV or NEXT button to enter thesubmenu. RESET will be displayed.

3. Press the TUNE/DISP knob to reset. A chime willbe heard to verify the new setting and DONE willbe displayed for one second.

The low tire pressure monitor is now reset. You caneither exit the programming mode by following theinstructions later in this section or program the nextfeature available on your vehicle.

2-46

LT DELAY (Delayed HeadlampIllumination)This feature allows the headlamps and parking lamps tostay on for a fixed amount of time after you exit thevehicle, or for them to turn off immediately.

Programmable ModesMode 1: OFF

Mode 2: 30 SEC

Mode 3: 60 SEC

Your vehicle was originally programmed to Mode 2. Themode may have been changed since then. Todetermine the current mode, or to change the mode, dothe following:

1. Scroll, using the SEEK/PSCAN up or down arrows,until LT DELAY appears on the display.

2. Press the PREV or NEXT button to enter thesubmenu. The current selection will have anasterisk (*) next to it. If you do not wish to changethe current mode, you can either exit theprogramming mode by following the directions laterin this section or program the next featureavailable on your vehicle.

3. Scroll, using the PREV or NEXT buttons, throughthe modes to change the current mode.

4. With your preference displayed, press theTUNE/DISP button to select. A chime will be heardto verify the new setting. The new selection willbe displayed with an asterisk (*) for one second.

The mode you selected is now set. You can either exitthe programming mode by following the instructionslater in this section or program the next feature availableon your vehicle.

AUTOLOCK (Automatic Door Lock andUnlock)With the ignition in ON and the doors closed, thisfeature allows the vehicle doors to automatically lockand unlock when the driver shifts the transaxle into andout of PARK (P), or to turn the feature off.


Mode 2: LCK ONLY — Automatic door lockon/automatic door unlock off.

Mode 3: DRVR UNL — Automatic door lockon/automatic door unlock on (driver’s door only).Automatic door lock on/automatic door unlock on(driver’s door only).

Mode 4: ALL UNL — Automatic door lock on/automaticdoor unlock on.

2-47


1. Scroll, using the SEEK/PSCAN up or down arrows,until AUTOLOCK appears on the display.





FOB LIGHT (Remote VisualVerification)This feature allows the exterior lights to flash when theremote keyless entry transmitter is used to lock orunlock the vehicle or to program no verification.


Mode 2: ON — One flash for each remote lock/twoflashes for each remote unlock.


1. Scroll, using the SEEK/PSCAN up or down arrows,until FOB LIGHT appears on the display.


2-48


4. With your preference displayed, press theTUNE/DISP button to select. A chime will be heardto verify the new setting. A new selection will bedisplayed with an asterisk (*) for one second.

If your vehicle has the optional content theft-deterrentsystem, the first time a remote UNLOCK commandis received, three flashes will be seen and three hornchirps heard to indicate an alarm condition has occurredsince last arming. See Theft-Deterrent Systems onpage 2-16.


FOB HORN (Remote AudibleVerification)This feature allows the horn to chirp when the remotekeyless entry transmitter is used to lock or unlockthe vehicle or to program no verification.


Mode 2: PARTIAL — One chirp for each remote LOCKcommand/no chirp for remote UNLOCK command.

Mode 3: FULL — One chirp for each remote LOCKcommand/two chirps for the first remote UNLOCKcommand.


1. Scroll, using the SEEK/PSCAN up or down arrows,until FOB HORN appears on the display.



2-49

4. With your preference displayed, press the TUNE/DISP button to select. A chime will be heard toverify the new setting. The new selection willbe displayed with an asterisk (*) for one second.

If your vehicle has the optional content theft-deterrentsystem, the first time the remote UNLOCK command isreceived three flashes will be seen and three chirpswill be heard to indicate an alarm condition has occurredsince last arming. See Theft-Deterrent Systems onpage 2-16.


ALARM (Content Theft Operation)This feature allows the content theft-deterrent system tobe turned on or off.

Programmable ModesMode 1: ALRM OFF

Mode 2: ALRM ON


1. Scroll, using the SEEK/PSCAN up or down arrows,until ALARM appears on the display.





2-50

TRNKJAMB (Trunk Jamb)This feature allows the content theft system trunk locksensor to be disabled or enabled.

Programmable ModesMode 1: TRNK OFF

Mode 2: TRNK ON


1. Scroll, using the SEEK /PSCAN up or down arrows,until TRNKJAMB appears on the display.





CHIRP (Horn Chirp Timer)This feature allows you to choose between short or longhorn chirp sounds when the remote keyless entrytransmitter is used.

Programmable ModesMode 1: SHORT

Mode 2: LONG


1. Scroll, using the SEEK/PSCAN up or down arrows,until CHIRP appears on the display.

2-51





ORIG. SET (Return to the OriginalSettings)This feature allows you to return all featurecustomization settings back to their original factorysettings. To reset do the following:

1. Scroll, using the SEEK/PSCAN up or down arrows,until ORIG. SET appears on the display.

2. Press the PREV or NEXT button to enter thesubmenu. SET ALL will appear.


The original factory settings are now reset. You caneither exit the programming mode by following theinstructions later in this section or program the nextfeature available on your vehicle.

2-52

FOB PROG (Remote Keyless EntryTransmitter Programming)This feature allows you to match the remote keylessentry transmitter to your vehicle. To match thetransmitter do the following:

1. Scroll, using the SEEK/PSCAN up or down arrows,until FOB PROG appears on the display.

2. Press the PREV or NEXT button to enter thesubmenu. BEGIN will be displayed.

3. Press the TUNE/DISP button to start programming.When the message PUSH FOB flashes, press andhold the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on thefirst transmitter at the same time for 15 seconds. Achime will be heard to verify the transmitter islearned.

4. Repeat Step 3 for each additional transmitter.

The transmitter is programmed now. You can either exitthe programming mode by following the instructionslater in this section or program the next feature availableon your vehicle.

EXIT (Exit Feature CustomizationMode)This feature allows you to exit the vehicle customizationprogramming. To exit do the following:

• Scroll until EXIT appears on the display.

• Press the TUNE/DISP button to exit programming.A chime will be heard to verify the exit.

2-53

✍ NOTES

2-54

Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-4Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-6Other Warning Devices ...................................3-6Horn .............................................................3-7Tilt Wheel .....................................................3-7Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-7Exterior Lamps .............................................3-14Interior Lamps ..............................................3-17Accessory Power Outlets ...............................3-19Auxiliary Power Connection

(Power Drop) ............................................3-20Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter ........................3-21

Climate Controls ............................................3-22Dual Climate Control System ..........................3-22Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-25Passenger Compartment Air Filter ...................3-26

Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators .............3-28Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-29Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-31Tachometer .................................................3-32Safety Belt Reminder Light .............................3-32Air Bag Readiness Light ................................3-33Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-34

Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light .............3-35Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Light ...3-35Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-36Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-37Cruise Control Light ......................................3-39Fuel Gage ...................................................3-40

Message Center .............................................3-40Service Traction System Warning Message ......3-41Traction Active Message ................................3-41Battery Warning Message ..............................3-42Hot Coolant Temperature Warning Message .....3-42Low Oil Pressure Message ............................3-43Low Engine Oil Level Message .......................3-43Change Engine Oil Message ..........................3-44Low Tire Message ........................................3-44Door Ajar Warning Message ...........................3-45Trunk Ajar Warning Message .........................3-45Security Message .........................................3-46Low Washer Fluid Warning Message ...............3-46Low Fuel Warning Message ...........................3-47Low Brake Fluid Warning Message .................3-47Service Vehicle Soon Message .......................3-48Highbeam Out Warning Message ....................3-48

Section 3 Instrument Panel

3-1

Driver Information Center (DIC) .......................3-49

Trip Computer ................................................3-52

Audio System(s) .............................................3-53Setting the Time ...........................................3-53Radio with Cassette ......................................3-54Radio with CD ..............................................3-64Radio with Cassette and CD ..........................3-75Theft-Deterrent Feature ..................................3-89

Audio Steering Wheel Controls .......................3-90Understanding Radio Reception ......................3-91Care of Your Cassette Tape Player .................3-91Care of Your CDs .........................................3-92Care of Your CD Player ................................3-92Backglass Antenna .......................................3-93XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System (United

States Only) .............................................3-94Vehicle Customization Settings .......................3-94Chime Level Adjustment ................................3-94

Section 3 Instrument Panel

3-2

✍ NOTES

3-3

Instrument Panel Overview

3-4

The main components of your instrument panel arelisted here:A. Instrument Panel Fuse Block. See Fuses and Circuit

Breakers on page 5-95.B. Traction Control On/Off Button (If Equipped). See

Traction Control System (TCS) (3800 V6 Engine) onpage 4-9.

C. Multifunction Lever. See Turn Signal/MultifunctionLever on page 3-7.

D. Audio Steering Wheel Controls (Option). See AudioSteering Wheel Controls on page 3-90.

E. Hazard Warning Flasher Button. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 3-6.

F. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on page 3-53.G. Air Vent. See Outlet Adjustment on page 3-25.H. Exterior Lamps Control. See Exterior Lamps

on page 3-14.

I. Remote Trunk Release Button. See “Remote TrunkRlease” under Trunk on page 2-10.

J. Tilt Steering Wheel Lever. See Tilt Wheel onpage 3-7.

K. Hood Release. See Hood Release on page 5-10.L. Steering Wheel Cruise Control (If Equipped).

See “Cruise Control” under Turn Signal/MultifunctionLever on page 3-7.

M. Ignition Switch. See “Ignition Positions” under NewVehicle Break-In on page 2-18.

N. Center Console Shift Lever (If Equipped). See“Console Shift Lever” under Parking Brake onpage 2-27.

O. Climate Controls. See Dual Climate Control Systemon page 3-22.

P. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 2-43.

3-5

Hazard Warning Flashers

Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. Theyalso let police know you have a problem. Your frontand rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.

The hazard warningflasher button is located tothe right of the steeringwheel on the instrumentpanel cluster.

The hazard warning flashers work no matter whatposition your key is in, and even if the key isn’t in.

Press the button to make the front and rear turn signallamps flash on and off. Press the button again toturn the flashers off.

When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turnsignals won’t work.

Other Warning DevicesIf you carry reflective triangles, you can set one up atthe side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behindyour vehicle.

3-6

HornPress near or on the horn symbols on your steeringwheel pad to sound the horn.

Tilt WheelA tilt steering wheel allows you to adjust the steeringwheel before you drive. You can raise the steering wheelto the highest level to give your legs more room whenyou exit and enter. The lever to adjust it is located on theleft side of the steering column.

To adjust the wheel, holdthe steering wheel and pullthe lever. Move thesteering wheel to acomfortable level, thenrelease the lever tolock the wheel into place.

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

The lever on the left side of the steering columnincludes the following:• Turn Signal and Lane-Change Indicator• Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer• Flash-to-Pass• Windshield Wipers• Windshield Washer• Cruise Control

For more information on the exterior lamps, see ExteriorLamps on page 3-14 later in this section.

3-7

Turn and Lane-Change IndicatorThe turn signal has two upward (for right) and twodownward (for left) positions. These positions allow youto signal a turn or a lane change.

To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.When the turn is finished, the lever will returnautomatically.

An arrow on the instrumentpanel cluster will flash inthe direction of theturn or lane change.

To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the leveruntil the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until youcomplete your lane change. The lever will return by itselfwhen you release it.

If the arrow flashes faster than normal as you signal aturn or a lane change, a signal bulb may be burnedout and other drivers won’t see your turn signal.

If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid anaccident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you signala turn, check for burned-out bulbs and then check thefuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-95.

Turn Signal On ChimeIf you leave either one of your turn signals on and drivemore than 3/4 mile (1.2 km), a chime will sound toalert you.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam ChangerTo change your headlamps from low beams tohigh beams, or high to low, pull the multifunction leverall the way toward you. Then release it.

While the high beams areon, this light on theinstrument panel clusteralso will be on.

This light works only while the ignition key is in the ONposition, and your fog lamps (if equipped) will not beilluminated when your high beams are on.

3-8

Flash-to-PassWith the turn signal lever in the low-beam position, pullthe lever toward you momentarily to switch tohigh-beams (to signal that you are going to pass).

If you have the headlamps on, they will return tolow-beams when you release the lever.

This feature operates even when the headlamps are off.

Windshield WipersThe windshield wipers will operate with the ignition inACC or ON.

WIPER: To operate the windshield wipers, turn theband labeled WIPER, located on the multifunction lever,upward or downward.

OFF: To stop the wipers turn the band to OFF.

The five marks between OFF and LO are delay settings.For a longer delay between wiping cycles, turn theband downward. For a shorter delay between wipingcycles turn the band upward.

LO (Low Speed): Turn the band up to LO for a steadywiping at a low speed.

HI (High Speed): Turn the band up to HI for a steadywiping at a high speed.

MIST: Turn the band downward to MIST for a singlewiping cycle. Hold the band at this setting until thewindshield wipers start, then release it. The windshieldwipers will stop after one wipe. If additional cyclesare needed, hold the band on MIST longer.

Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper bladesbefore using them. Hold the band at this setting until thewindshield wipers start, then release it. The windshieldwipers will stop after one wipe. If additional cyclesare needed, hold the band on MIST longer.

Heavy snow or ice can overload your wipers. A circuitbreaker will stop them until the motor cools. Clear awaysnow or ice to prevent an overload. If your bladesbecome damaged, get new blades or blade inserts. SeeWindshield Wiper Blade Replacement on page 5-60for more information.

3-9

Windshield WasherAt the top of the multifunction lever, there’s a paddlewith the word PUSH on it. To spray washer fluid on thewindshield, push the paddle. The wipers will run forseveral sweeps and then either stop or return to yourpreset speed. The ignition key must be in ACC or ON forthis to work. See Windshield Washer Fluid onpage 5-44.

{CAUTION:

In freezing weather, don’t use your washeruntil the windshield is warmed. Otherwise thewasher fluid can form ice on the windshield,blocking your vision.

When you are low on washer fluid, the LOW WASHERFLUID message will be illuminated in the messagecenter for 60 seconds. When the ignition is turned off,this message will appear again for three secondsto remind you that the fluid level is low.

Until the fluid tank is refilled, every time you start yourvehicle, the LOW WASHER FLUID message will beilluminated in the message center for 60 seconds.Be sure to refill the tank right away.

United States Canada

3-10

Cruise ControlWith cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your footon the accelerator. This can really help on longtrips. Cruise control does not work at speeds belowabout 25 mph (40 km/h).

When you apply your brakes, the cruise controlshuts off.

{CAUTION:

• Cruise control can be dangerous whereyou can’t drive safely at a steady speed.So, don’t use your cruise control onwinding roads or in heavy traffic.

• Cruise control can be dangerous onslippery roads. On such roads, fastchanges in tire traction can causeneedless wheel spinning, and you couldlose control. Don’t use cruise control onslippery roads.

If your vehicle is in cruise control when the tractioncontrol system (option) begins to limit wheel spin, thecruise control will automatically disengage. See TractionControl System (TCS) (3800 V6 Engine) on page 4-9.When road conditions allow you to safely use itagain, you may turn the cruise control back on.

Setting Cruise ControlThe cruise control ON/OFF switch is located at the endof the multifunction lever.

{CAUTION:

If you leave your cruise control on when you’renot using cruise, you might hit a button and gointo cruise when you don’t want to. You couldbe startled and even lose control. Keep thecruise control switch off until you want to usecruise control.

1. Slide the cruise control ON lever on the turn signallever to the right to turn it on.

2. Get up to the speed you want.

3-11

3. Press the SET buttonlocated on the steeringwheel and release it.

4. Take your foot off the accelerator.

The CRUISE light on the instrument panel cluster willcome on after the cruise control has been set tothe desired speed.

Resuming a Set SpeedSuppose you set your cruise control at a desired speedand then you apply the brake. This, of course shutsoff the cruise control. But you don’t need to reset it.

Once you’re going about25 mph (40 km/h) or more,press the RESUMEbutton on your steeringwheel. You’ll go right backup to your chosenspeed and stay there.

3-12

Increasing Speed While Using CruiseControlThere are two ways to go to a higher speed:

• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higherspeed. Press the SET button on the steering wheel,then release the button and the accelerator pedal.You’ll now cruise at the higher speed.

• Press the ACCEL (Accelerate) button on thesteering wheel. Hold it there until you get up to thespeed you want and then release the button.(To increase your speed in very small amounts,press the ACCEL button briefly and then release it.Each time you do this, your vehicle will go about1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster).

The accelerate feature will only work after you set thecruise control speed by pressing the SET button on thesteering wheel.

Reducing Speed While Using CruiseControlThere are two ways to reduce your speed while usingcruise control:

• Press the COAST button on the steering wheeluntil you reach the lower speed you want, thenrelease it.

• To slow down in very small amounts, press theCOAST button on the steering wheel briefly.Each time you do this, you’ll go about 1 mph(1.6 km/h) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle While UsingCruise ControlUse the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle willslow down to the cruise speed you set earlier.

3-13

Using Cruise Control on HillsHow well your cruise control will work on hills dependsupon your speed, load and the steepness of thehills. When going up steep hills, you may have to stepon the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed.When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift toa lower gear to keep your speed down. Of course,applying the brake takes you out of cruise control. Manydrivers find this to be too much trouble and don’t usecruise control on steep hills.

Ending Cruise ControlThere are three ways to cancel the cruise control:

• Step lightly on the brake pedal.

• Slide the lever on the multifunction lever to the leftto the OFF position.

• Press the COAST and ACCEL buttons at thesame time.

Erasing Speed MemoryWhen you turn off the cruise control or the ignition, yourcruise control set speed memory is erased.

Exterior Lamps

The exterior lamps controlis located on theinstrument panel to the leftof the steering wheel.

It controls the following systems:

• Headlamps

• Taillamps

• Parking Lamps

• License Plate Lamps

• Instrument Panel Lights

3-14

The exterior lamps control has three positions:

Off: Push the control all the way in to turn off theexterior lamps.

Parking Lamps: Pull the control out halfway to turn onthe parking lamps together with the following:

• Taillamps

• License Plate Lamps

• Instrument Panel Lights

Headlamps: Pull the control all the way out to turn onthe headlamps together with the previously listedlamps and lights. See Interior Lamps on page 3-17 forinformation on the instrument panel brightnesscontrol and on the dome lamps. A warning chime willsound if you open the driver’s door when the ignitionswitch is off and the headlamps are on.

Daytime Running Lamps/AutomaticHeadlamp SystemDaytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier forothers to see the front of your vehicle during theday. DRL can be helpful in many different drivingconditions, but they can be especially helpful in the shortperiods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functionaldaytime running lamps are required on all vehiclesfirst sold in Canada.

A light sensor on top of the instrument panel makes theDRL work, so be sure it isn’t covered.

The DRL system’s automatic headlamp control willmake your high-beam headlamps come on at a reducedbrightness when the following conditions are met:

• The ignition is on,

• the exterior lamps control is off and

• the gearshift is not in PARK (P).

When the DRL are on, only your high-beam headlamps,at a reduced level of brightness, will be on. Theheadlamps, taillamps, sidemarker and other lamps won’tbe on. Your instrument panel and cluster won’t be litup either.

When it’s dark enough outside, your high-beamheadlamps will turn off and the headlamps and parkinglamps will turn on. The other lamps that come onwith your headlamps will also come on.

When it’s bright enough outside, your headlamps will gooff and your DRL will come on.

As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regularheadlamp system when you need it.

3-15

Delayed HeadlampsThe delayed headlamps feature provides a period ofexterior lighting as you leave the area around yourvehicle. The feature is activated when the headlampsare on due to the automatic headlamps controlfeature described previously in this section, and whenthe ignition is turned off. Your headlamps will thenremain on until the exterior lamps control is moved tothe parking lamps position or until either a 30 second or60 second lighting period has ended.

If you turn off the ignition with the headlamps switch inthe parking lamps or headlamps position, the delayedheadlamps cycle will not occur.

To disable the delayed headlamps feature or changethe time of delay, see Vehicle Customization Settings onpage 3-94.

Fog Lamps

If your vehicle is equippedwith fog lamps, the buttonis located on theinstrument panel next tothe exterior lampscontrol wheel to the left ofthe steering column.

Your ignition must be in ON for the fog lamps toilluminate.

To turn the fog lamps on, press the FOG button. A lightwill come on in the button to let you know that thefog lamps are on. Press the FOG button again to turnthe fog lamps off.

The ignition must be ON and the parking lamps must beon for your fog lamps to work.

The fog lamps will go off while you change to high-beamheadlamps.

3-16

Interior LampsInstrument Panel BrightnessThis feature controls the instrument panel lights.The control for this feature is located on the exteriorlamps control. Your parking lamps must be on for thisfeature to work. Turn the control clockwise to brightenthe lights or counterclockwise to dim them.

Courtesy LampsWhen any door is opened, several lamps come on.These lamps are courtesy lamps. They make it easy foryou to enter and leave your vehicle. You can alsoturn these lamps on by turning the exterior lamps controlall the way clockwise.Some of the lamps have switches so you can turn themon, even when the doors are closed. These lampsare reading lamps.

Entry LightingYour vehicle may be equipped with courtesy lamps thatwill come on and stay on for a set time wheneveryou press UNLOCK on the remote keyless entrytransmitter (if equipped).If you open a door, the lamps will stay on while it’s openand then turn off automatically about 25 seconds afteryou close it. If you press UNLOCK and don’t opena door, the lamps will turn off after about 40 seconds.

Entry lighting includes a feature called theater dimming.With theater dimming, the lamps don’t just turn off atthe end of the delay time. Instead, they slowly dim afterthe delay time until they go out. The delay time iscanceled if you turn the ignition key to ON or pressthe power door lock switch. The lamps will dimright away.

When the ignition is on, illuminated entry is inactive,which means the courtesy lamps won’t come on unlessa door is opened.

Delayed Entry LightingDelayed entry lighting illuminates the interior for aperiod of time after all the doors have been closed.

The ignition must be off for delayed entry lightingto work. Immediately after all the doors have beenclosed, the delayed entry lighting feature will continue towork until one of the following occurs:

• The ignition is moved to ON,

• the doors are locked, or

• an illumination period of 25 seconds has elapsed.

If during the illumination period a door is opened,the timed illumination period will be canceled and theinterior lamps will remain on because a door is open.

3-17

Delayed Exit LightingThis feature illuminates the interior for a period of timeafter the key is removed from the ignition.

The ignition must be off for delayed exit lighting to work.When the key is removed, interior illumination willactivate and remain on until one of the following occurs:

• The ignition is moved to ON,

• the power door locks are activated, or

• an illumination period of 25 seconds has elapsed.

If during the illumination period a door is opened,the timed illumination period will be canceled and theinterior lamps will remain on because a door is open.

Parade DimmingThe instrument panel has an added feature calledparade mode. This feature prohibits the dimming of yourinstrument panel displays during the daylight whilethe headlamps are on so that you’ll still be able to seethe displays.

Reading LampsYour vehicle may be equipped with reading lamps thatare located on the assist handles in the headliner.These lamps and the interior courtesy lamps come onwhen any door is opened. Press the lens to turnthem on. Press it again to turn them off.

Dome LampIf your vehicle has this feature, the dome lamp willcome on when you open a door. You can also turn thislamp on by turning the exterior lamps control clockwiseas far as it will go. Vehicles that have the optionalsunroof do not have a dome lamp.

Battery Rundown ProtectionYour vehicle has a feature to help prevent you fromdraining the battery in case you accidentally leave on theinterior courtesy lamps, reading/map lamps, visorvanity lamps, trunk lamp or glove box lamps. If you leaveany of these lamps on, they will automatically turn offafter 10 minutes, if the ignition is moved to OFF.The lamps won’t come back on again until you dothe following:

• Turn the ignition on, or

• turn the exterior lamps control off, then on again.

If your vehicle has less than 15 miles (25 km) onthe odometer, the battery saver will turn off the lampsafter only three minutes.

Battery rundown protection will also work if theheadlamps are left on. After having been left on for10 minutes, the headlamps and the parking lamps willflash three times. They will remain on for one moreminute before being turned off automatically.

3-18

Accessory Power Outlets

Your vehicle has a 12-voltoutlet which can be usedto plug in electricalequipment such as acellular telephone,a compact disc player, etc.

On vehicles with a center console, it is located at therear of the console. Lift the cover to access theoutlet. Close the cover when not using the outlet.

On vehicles without a center console, it is located in theashtray drawer to the right of the ashtray. Removethe rubber cover to access the outlet. When not usingthe outlet, make sure the cover is on it.

Notice: When using an accessory power outlet,maximum electrical load must not exceed amperagerating. Always turn off any electrical equipmentwhen not in use. Leaving electrical equipment on forextended periods will drain your battery.

Certain accessory plugs may not be compatible to theaccessory power outlet and could result in blown vehicleand adapter fuses. If you experience a problem, seeyour dealer for additional information on the poweraccessory plugs.

Notice: Adding some electrical equipment to yourvehicle can damage it or keep other things fromworking as they should. This wouldn’t be covered byyour warranty. Check with your dealer beforeadding electrical equipment, and never use anythingthat exceeds the amperage rating.

When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow theproper installation instructions included with theequipment. Check with your dealer before addingelectrical equipment, and never use anything thatexceeds the amperage rating.

Notice: Power outlets are designed for accessoryplugs only. Do not hang any type of accessoryor accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use ofthe power outlet can cause damage not coveredby your warranty.

Console Version shown

3-19

Auxiliary Power Connection(Power Drop)Your vehicle is equipped with an auxiliary powerconnection. This feature provides power, ground andaccessory wires which can be accessed to addaftermarket electrical equipment to your vehicle.

It is located on thepassenger’s side of thevehicle, under theglove box, and is labeledwith a wire functionand fuse rating.

Notice: Adding some electrical equipment to yourvehicle can damage it or keep other things fromworking as they should. This wouldn’t be covered byyour warranty. Check with your dealer beforeadding electrical equipment, and never use anythingthat exceeds the amperage rating.

For information on accessing the connection andelectrical hookup, please refer to your service manual.To order a service manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 7-11.

3-20

Ashtrays and Cigarette LighterYour vehicle may have ashtrays and a cigarette lighter.The front ashtray may be on the instrument panel oron the console. To remove the instrument panel ashtray,open it, push down on the locking tab and pull outthe ashtray.

To remove the console ashtray, open the ashtray door,lift up on the ashtray and pull it out.

If your vehicle is equipped with a center console, a rearashtray may be located located behind a small doorat the rear of the console. Push on the right side of thedoor. The ashtray will then turn to the right for usage.You can only access the ashtray by pushing on thedoor’s right side. To remove the ashtray, push down onthe snuffer located in the middle of the ashtray andlift it out.

Notice: Don’t put papers or other flammable itemsinto your ashtrays. Hot cigarettes or other smokingmaterials could ignite them, causing adamaging fire.

Notice: Don’t hold a cigarette lighter in with yourhand while it is heating. If you do, it won’t be able toback away from the heating element when it’sready. That can make it overheat, damaging thelighter and the heating element.

To use the lighter, just push it in all the way and let go.When it’s ready, it will pop back out by itself.

3-21

Climate Controls

Dual Climate Control SystemWith this system you can control the heating, cooling,defrost, defog and ventilation for your vehicle.

Manual OperationTurn the right knob clockwise or counterclockwise todirect the airflow inside of your vehicle.

To change the current mode, select one of the following:

H (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrumentpanel outlets.

) (Bi-Level): This mode allows for approximately a50/50 split of air to the instrument panel outlets andto the floor outlets.

6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to thefloor outlets, with some of the air directed to thewindshield and side window outlets. In this mode, thesystem will automatically select Outside Air.

The right knob can also be used to select defog ordefrost mode. For more information, see “Defogging andDefrosting” later in this section.

It should be noted, that the air conditioning compressorwill be engaged unless the outside temperature is40° F (4°C) or below. Recirculation cannot be selectedwhen in Floor Mode.

9 (Fan): Turn the left knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed.If the airflow seems low when the fan is at the highestsetting, the passenger compartment air filter, ifequipped, may need to be replaced. For moreinformation, see Passenger Compartment Air Filter onpage 3-26 and Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Serviceson page 6-4.

3-22

: (Outside Air): Press this button to turn theoutside air mode on. When this mode is on, outside airwill circulate throughout your vehicle. When thebutton is pressed, an indicator light in the button willcome on to let you know that it is activated. The outsideair mode can be used with all modes, but it cannotbe used with the recirculation mode.

You may have to set the instrument panel brightnesscontrol to the highest setting during the day to seethe indicator lamp.

The outside air mode can be used with all modes, but itcannot be used with the recirculation mode.

If you are in city traffic, your vehicle is stopped andidling, or the weather is hot, the system may switch fromthe outside air mode to the recirculation mode. Toprevent the air inside of your vehicle from becoming toostale, be sure to return to the outside air modeperiodically.

? (Recirculation): This mode keeps outside airfrom coming in the vehicle. It can be used to preventoutside air and odors from entering your vehicle or helpheat or cool the air inside your vehicle more quickly.Press this button to turn the recirculation mode on.When the button is pressed, an indicator light will comeon. The air-conditioning compressor also comes on.


The recirculation mode cannot be used with outside airmodes.

D or P (Temperature Control): Slide the leversmarked D (Driver) or P (Passenger) to increase ordecrease the temperature on the driver’s side orthe passenger’s side of the vehicle.

# A/C (Air Conditioning): Press this button to turnthe air-conditioning system on or off. When A/C ispressed, an indicator light will come on to let you knowthat air conditioning is activated.


3-23

On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside airescape; then close them. This helps to reduce the timeit takes for your vehicle to cool down. It also helpsthe system to operate more efficiently.

For quick cool down on hot days, do the following:

1. Select the vent mode.

2. Select the recirculation mode.

3. Select A/C.

4. Select the coolest temperature for both zones.

5. Select the highest fan speeds.

Using these settings together for long periods of timemay cause the air inside of your vehicle to become toodry. To prevent this from happening, after the airinside of your vehicle has cooled, turn the recirculationmode off.

The air-conditioning system removes moisture from theair, so you may sometimes notice a small amount ofwater dripping underneath your vehicle while idlingor after turning off the engine. This is normal.

Defogging and DefrostingFog on the inside of the windows is a result of highhumidity (moisture) condensing on the cool windowglass. This can be minimized if the climate controlsystem is used properly. There are two modes to clearfog or frost from your windshield. Use the defogmode to clear the windows of fog or moisture and warmthe passengers. Use the defrost mode to remove fogor frost from the windshield more quickly.Turn the right knob clockwise to select the defog ordefrost mode.

- (Defog): This mode directs air equally to thewindshield and the floor outlets. When you select thismode, the system turns off recirculation and runsthe air-conditioning compressor unless the outsidetemperature is below 40°F (4°C). The recirculation modecannot be selected while in the defog mode.

Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.0 (Defrost): This mode directs half of the air tothe windshield and side window vents and half to thefloor vents. In this mode, the system will automaticallyforce outside air into your vehicle. The recirculationmode cannot be selected while in the defog mode. Theair conditioning compressor will run automatically inthis setting, unless the outside temperature is below40°F (4°C).

Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.

3-24

Rear Window DefoggerThe rear window defogger uses a warming grid toremove fog from the rear window.

< REAR: The rear window defogger will turn offapproximately 20 minutes after the button is pressed. Ifturned on again, the defogger will run for the sameamount of time. The defogger can also be turned off bypressing the button again or by turning off the engine.

Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.

If your vehicle has heated outside rearview mirrors,the mirrors will heat to help clear fog or frost from thesurface of the mirror when the rear window defog buttonis pressed.

Notice: Don’t use anything sharp on the inside ofthe rear window. If you do, you could cut or damagethe warming grid, and the repairs wouldn’t becovered by your warranty. Do not attach a temporaryvehicle license, tape, a decal or anything similarto the defogger grid.

Outlet Adjustment

Use the knob locatedbelow or to the side of theoutlet, to change thedirection of the air flow.

3-25

Operation Tips• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air

inlets at the base of the windshield that mayblock the flow of air into your vehicle.

• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors mayadversely affect the performance of the system.

• Keep the path under the front seats clear of objectsto help circulate the air inside your vehicle moreeffectively.

• If the airflow seems low when the fan is at thehighest setting, the passenger compartmentair filter, if equipped, may need to replaced. Formore information, see Passenger Compartment AirFilter on page 3-26 and Part A: ScheduledMaintenance Services on page 6-4.

Passenger Compartment Air FilterYour vehicle may be equipped with a passengercompartment particulate air filter. It is locatedunderneath the hood just below the windshield wiperarm on the passenger’s side of the vehicle, underneaththe air inlet grille.

The filter traps most of the pollen from air entering theClimate Control System. Like your engine’s aircleaner/filter, it may need to be changed periodically toinsure system performance. For information on howoften to change the passenger compartment airfilter, see Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-5.

3-26

To change the passenger compartment air filter, use thefollowing steps:

1. Turn off the ignition when the windshield wipers arein the up position.

2. Raise the vehicle hood.

3. Disconnect the windshield washer pump hose fromthe fender rail and air inlet grille.

4. Peel back the hood weatherstrip from thepassenger’s side of the vehicle halfway to center.

5. Remove the air inlet grille retainers.

6. Remove the air inlet grille.

7. Remove the air deflector grille in the compartment.

8. Remove the old passenger compartment airfilter.

9. Reverse the steps to install the new air filter.

For the type of filter to use, see Normal MaintenanceReplacement Parts on page 5-105.

3-27

Warning Lights, Gages andIndicatorsThis part describes the warning lights and gages thatmay be on your vehicle. The pictures will help youlocate them.

Warning lights and gages can signal that something iswrong before it becomes serious enough to causean expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention toyour warning lights and gages could also save youor others from injury.

Warning lights come on when there may be or is aproblem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you willsee in the details on the next few pages, somewarning lights come on briefly when you start theengine just to let you know they’re working. If you arefamiliar with this section, you should not be alarmedwhen this happens.

Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problemwith one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gagesand warning lights work together to let you know whenthere’s a problem with your vehicle.

When one of the warning lights comes on and stays onwhen you are driving, or when one of the gagesshows there may be a problem, check the section thattells you what to do about it. Please follow thismanual’s advice. Waiting to do repairs can be costly –and even dangerous. So please get to know yourwarning lights and gages. They’re a big help.

Your vehicle may also have a Driver Information Center(DIC) that works along with the warning lights andgages. See Driver Information Center (DIC) onpage 3-49.

3-28

Instrument Panel ClusterYour instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You’ll know howfast you’re going, about how much fuel is in your tank and many other things you need to drive safely andeconomically.

Uplevel 3400 V6 Engine Cluster: United States version with ABS and Traction Control shown, Canada similar

3-29

Uplevel 3800 V6 Engine Cluster: United States version with ABS and Traction Control shown, Canada similar

3-30

Speedometer and OdometerYour speedometer lets you see your speed in bothmiles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).Your odometer shows how far your vehicle hasbeen driven in either miles (used in the United States)or in kilometers (used in Canada).

Your vehicle has a tamper-resistant odometer. If yousee ERROR, you’ll know someone has probablytampered with it and the numbers may not be accurate.

You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needsa new odometer installed. If the new one can be set tothe mileage total of the old odometer, then that willbe done. But if it can’t, then it will be set at zero and alabel must be put on the driver’s door to show theold mileage reading when the new odometerwas installed.

Trip OdometerYour trip odometer tells how far you have driven sinceyou last reset it.

Your trip/select reset switch will go back and forthbetween the odometer and the trip odometer if thebutton is pressed and released within 1.5 seconds. If thebutton is pressed and held for longer than 1.5 secondswhile in the trip odometer mode, it will be reset tozero. If the button is pressed and held for longer than1.5 seconds while in the odometer mode, it will haveno effect.

Your trip odometer will work no matter what positionyour key is in, and even if the key isn’t in.

3-31

Tachometer

Your vehicle may have atachometer that displaysthe engine speed inthousands of revolutionsper minute (rpm).

Notice: Do not operate the engine with thetachometer in the shaded warning area, or enginedamage may occur.

Safety Belt Reminder LightWhen the key is turned to ON, a chime will come on forabout several seconds to remind people to fastentheir safety belts, unless the driver’s safety belt isalready buckled.

The safety belt light willalso come on and stay onfor several seconds,then it will flash forseveral more.

3-32

Air Bag Readiness LightThere is an air bag readiness light on the instrumentpanel, which shows the air bag symbol. The systemchecks the air bag’s electrical system for malfunctions.The light tells you if there is an electrical problem.The system check includes the air bag sensors, the airbag modules, the wiring and the crash sensing anddiagnostic module. For more information on the air bagsystem, see Air Bag Systems on page 1-51.

This light will come onwhen you start yourvehicle, and it will flash fora few seconds. Thenthe light should go out.This means the systemis ready.

If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start thevehicle or comes on when you are driving, your airbag system may not work properly. Have your vehicleserviced right away.

{CAUTION:

If the air bag readiness light stays on after youstart your vehicle, it means the air bag systemmay not be working properly. The air bags inyour vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or theycould even inflate without a crash. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others, have yourvehicle serviced right away if the air bagreadiness light stays on after you start yourvehicle.

The air bag readiness light should flash for a fewseconds when you turn the ignition key to ON. If thelight doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it willbe ready to warn you if there is a problem.

3-33

Brake System Warning LightYour vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into twoparts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can stillwork and stop you. For good braking, though, you needboth parts working well.

If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem.The LOW BRAKE FLUID message in the messagecenter will also appear when there is a brake problem.See Low Brake Fluid Warning Message on page 3-47.Have your brake system inspected right away.

This light should come on briefly when you turn theignition key to ON. If it doesn’t come on then, have itfixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a problem.

When the ignition is on, the brake system warning lightwill also come on when you set your parking brake.The light will stay on if your parking brake doesn’trelease fully. If it stays on after your parking brake isfully released, it means you have a brake problem.

If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off theroad and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal isharder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to thefloor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on,have the vehicle towed for service. See Brake SystemWarning Light on page 3-34 and Towing Your Vehicle onpage 4-31.

{CAUTION:

Your brake system may not be workingproperly if the brake system warning light ison. Driving with the brake system warning lighton can lead to an accident. If the light is stillon after you’ve pulled off the road and stoppedcarefully, have the vehicle towed for service.


3-34

Anti-Lock Brake SystemWarning Light

If your vehicle is equippedwith anti-lock brakes, theanti-lock brake systemwarning light should comeon for a few secondswhen you turn the ignitionkey to ON.

If the anti-lock brake system warning light stays onlonger than normal after you’ve started your engine, turnthe ignition off. Or, if the light comes on and stays onwhen you’re driving, stop as soon as possible and turnthe ignition off. Then start the engine again to resetthe system. If the light still stays on, or comes on againwhile you’re driving, the anti-lock brake system needsservice and you don’t have anti-lock brakes.

The anti-lock brake system warning light should comeon briefly when you turn the ignition key to ON. Thisis normal. If the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixedso it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

Traction Control System (TCS)Warning Light

Your vehicle may have thetraction control system. If itdoes, this warning lightmay come on for thefollowing reasons:

• If you turn the system off by pressing the TRACOFF button located on the instrument panel, achime will sound and the warning light will come onand stay on. To turn the system back on, pressthe button again. The warning light should go off.

• If there’s a brake system problem that is specificallyrelated to traction control, the traction controlsystem will turn off and the warning light will comeon. If your brakes begin to overheat, the tractioncontrol system will turn off and the warning light willcome on until your brakes cool down.

If the traction control system warning light comes onand stays on for an extended period of time when thesystem is turned on, your vehicle needs service.

3-35

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage This gage shows the engine coolant temperature.

It also provides an indicator of how hard your vehicle isworking. During the majority of the operation, thegage will read 210°F (100°C) or less.

If you are pulling a load or going up hills, it is normal forthe temperature to fluctuate and approach the 250°F(122°C) mark. When the gage reads greater than 250°F(122°C), the HOT COOLANT TEMP light will beilluminated in the message center and a chime willsound continuously. If the gage reaches the 260°F(125°C) mark, it indicates that the cooling system isworking beyond its capacity.

See Engine Overheating on page 5-30.United States–3400 V6Engine Cluster

United States–3800 V6Engine Cluster

Canada–3400 V6 EngineCluster

Canada–3800 V6 EngineCluster

3-36

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Check Engine Light

Your vehicle is equipped with a computer whichmonitors operation of the fuel, ignition and emissioncontrol systems.

This system is called OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended toassure that emissions are at acceptable levels for thelife of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleanerenvironment. The CHECK ENGINE light comes on toindicate that there is a problem and service is required.Malfunctions often will be indicated by the systembefore any problem is apparent. This may prevent moreserious damage to your vehicle. This system is alsodesigned to assist your service technician in correctlydiagnosing any malfunction.

Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with thislight on, after a while, your emission controlsmay not work as well, your fuel economy may notbe as good and your engine may not run assmoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that maynot be covered by your warranty.

Notice: Modifications made to the engine,transaxle, exhaust, intake or fuel system of yourvehicle or the replacement of the original tires withother than those of the same Tire PerformanceCriteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emissioncontrols and may cause this light to come on.Modifications to these systems could lead to costlyrepairs not covered by your warranty. This mayalso result in a failure to pass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test.

This light should come on, as a check to show you it isworking, when the ignition is on and the engine isnot running. If the light doesn’t come on, have itrepaired. This light will also come on during amalfunction in one of two ways:

• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has beendetected. A misfire increases vehicle emissionsand may damage the emission control systemon your vehicle. Diagnosis and service maybe required.


3-37

• Light On Steady — An emission control systemmalfunction has been detected on your vehicle.Diagnosis and service may be required.

If the Light Is FlashingThe following may prevent more serious damage toyour vehicle:

• Reducing vehicle speed.

• Avoiding hard accelerations.

• Avoiding steep uphill grades.

• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount ofcargo being hauled as soon as it is possible.

If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “Ifthe Light Is On Steady” following.

If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,stop the vehicle.

Find a safe place to park your vehicle. Turn the key off,wait at least 10 seconds and restart the engine. Ifthe light remains on steady, see “If the Light Is OnSteady” following. If the light is still flashing, follow theprevious steps, and see your dealer for service as soonas possible.

If the Light Is on SteadyYou also may be able to correct the emission systemmalfunction by considering the following:

Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?

If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully installthe cap. See Filling Your Tank on page 5-7. Thediagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap hasbeen left off or improperly installed. A loose or missingfuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.A few driving trips with the cap properly installedshould turn the light off.

Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?

If so, your electrical system may be wet. The conditionwill usually be corrected when the electrical systemdries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.

Have you recently changed brands of fuel?

If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. SeeGasoline Octane on page 5-5. Poor fuel quality willcause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed.You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stallingwhen you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitationon acceleration or stumbling on acceleration. (Theseconditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)This will be detected by the system and cause thelight to turn on.

3-38

If you experience one or more of these conditions,change the fuel brand you use. It will require at leastone full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.

If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,your dealer can check the vehicle. Your dealer hasthe proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix anymechanical or electrical problems that may havedeveloped.

Emissions Inspection and MaintenanceProgramsSome state/provincial and local governments have ormay begin programs to inspect the emission controlequipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass thisinspection could prevent you from getting a vehicleregistration.

Here are some things you need to know to help yourvehicle pass an inspection:

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the CheckEngine light is on or not working properly.

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD(on-board diagnostic) system determines that criticalemission control systems have not been completelydiagnosed by the system. The vehicle would beconsidered not ready for inspection. This can happen ifyou have recently replaced your battery or if yourbattery has run down. The diagnostic system is

designed to evaluate critical emission control systemsduring normal driving. This may take several daysof routine driving. If you have done this and your vehiclestill does not pass the inspection for lack of OBDsystem readiness, your GM dealer can prepare thevehicle for inspection.

Cruise Control Light

Tthe CRUISE light comeson whenever you set yourcruise control. See“Cruise Control” underTurn Signal/MultifunctionLever on page 3-7.

3-39

Fuel Gage The fuel gage, when the ignition is on, tells you abouthow much fuel you have left in your tank.

The gage will first indicate empty before you are out offuel, and you should get more fuel as soon aspossible.

Here are four situations you may experience with yourfuel gage. None of these indicate a problem with the fuelgage.

• At the gas station, the fuel pump shuts off beforethe gage reads full.

• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than thefuel gage indicated. For example, the gage mayhave indicated the tank was half full, but it actuallytook a little more or less than half the tank’scapacity to fill the tank.

• The gage goes back to empty when you turn off theignition.

• The gage pointer moves while cornering, braking oracceleration.

Message CenterThe message center is located below the temperaturegage or the tachometer gage (if equipped) on theinstrument panel cluster. It gives you important safetyand maintenance facts.

United States-3400 V6Engine Cluster

United States-3800 V6Engine Cluster

Canada-3400 V6 EngineCluster

Canada-3800 V6 EngineCluster

3-40

Service Traction System WarningMessage

If your vehicle is equipped with the traction controlsystem and this message appears when you are driving,there is a problem with your traction control systemand your vehicle is in need of service.

When this message is displayed, the system will notlimit wheel spin. The message will stay on for60 seconds. Four chimes will also be heard. Adjust yourdriving accordingly.

When the ignition is turned off, this message will bedisplayed again for three seconds to remind youthat your traction control system is not working properly.Be sure to have your vehicle serviced right away.

Traction Active Message

If your vehicle is equipped with the traction controlsystem, this message will stay on a few seconds afterthe traction system stops limiting wheel spin.

This message will appear when the traction controlsystem is limiting wheel spin.



3-41

Battery Warning Message

When the vehicle is startedthis message will bedisplayed for threeseconds.

If the message is displayed when the engine is running,you may have a problem with your charging system.If there is a problem with the charging system, fourchimes will sound when the message comes on. Thebattery display will also stay on while the key is inON until the engine is started.

If the message stays on after starting the engine it couldindicate a problem with the generator drive belt, orsome other charging system problem. Have it checkedright away. Driving with this message on could drainyour battery.

If you must drive a short distance with this messagedisplayed, it helps to turn off all your accessories.

Hot Coolant Temperature WarningMessage

This message is displayed when the coolingsystem temperature gets hot. A chime will soundcontinuously, also.

Check the coolant temperature gage and the coolantlevel. See Engine Coolant on page 5-27, Engine CoolantTemperature Gage on page 3-36 and EngineOverheating on page 5-30 for further information.


3-42

Low Oil Pressure Message

This message is displayed in the message center whenthe engine oil pressure is low. A chime will soundcontinuously, also.

If this occurs, you should have your vehicle servicedimmediately.

{CAUTION:

Don’t keep driving if the oil pressure is low. Ifyou do, your engine can become so hot that itcatches fire. You or others could be burned.Check your oil as soon as possible and haveyour vehicle serviced.

Notice: Damage to your engine from neglected oilproblems can be costly and is not covered byyour warranty.

Low Engine Oil Level Message

Your vehicle may be equipped with a low engine oillevel message.

This message is displayed for 60 seconds at the start ofeach ignition cycle when the engine oil level is low.Four chimes will also sound.

When the ignition is turned off, this message will bedisplayed again for three seconds to remind youthat your engine oil level is low. Be sure to have yourvehicle serviced right away.

See Engine Oil on page 5-16 on how to check the oillevel and for what type of oil to add.



3-43

Change Engine Oil Message

This message is displayed when the engine oil needs tobe changed. It will appear for 60 seconds.

Once the engine oil has been changed, the CHANGEENGINE OIL message must be reset. Until it isreset, this message will be displayed for 60 secondseach time you start the engine. For more information onresetting the system, see “How to Reset the ChangeEngine Oil Message” under Engine Oil on page 5-16.

Low Tire Message

Your vehicle may be equipped with the tire pressuresystem which monitors the inflation pressure of the tires.

After the system has “learned” the tire pressure withproperly inflated tires, the LOW TIRE PRESSUREmessage will be displayed and four warning chimes willsound if the tire pressure in one tire becomes 12 psi(83 kPa) lower than the other three tires.

When you have checked the tire pressures, be sure toreset the tire inflation monitor. See “Tire PressureMonitor System” under Tires on page 5-61.

United States Canada United States Canada

3-44

Door Ajar Warning Message

This message will appear if one of the doors is notcompletely closed and the ignition is in ON.

If you are in a forward or reverse gear position you willalso hear four chimes.

Trunk Ajar Warning Message

This message will appear if the trunk is not completelyclosed and the ignition is in ON.

If you are in a forward or reverse gear position you willalso hear four chimes.


3-45

Security Message

This message is displayed to monitor the Passlock®

system.

If the security message is displayed continuously whiledriving and stays on, there may be a problem withthe Passlock® system. Your vehicle will not be protectedby Passlock® and you should see your dealer forservice. See Passlock® on page 2-17 for moreinformation.

Low Washer Fluid Warning Message

This message is displayed when the vehicle is low onwindshield washer fluid.

The message is only displayed for 60 seconds at thestart of each ignition cycle. For more informationsee Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5-44.

When the ignition is turned off, this message will bedisplayed again for three seconds to remind youthat your washer fluid is low. Be sure to refill the washerfluid tank right away.


3-46

Low Fuel Warning Message

This message is displayed when your vehicle is low onfuel. Four chimes will also sound.

Refer to the fuel gage for a better indication of theamount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank.

Low Brake Fluid Warning Message

This message will be displayed when your vehicle has abrake problem. The brake system warning light willalso be illuminated.

If this message appears, the brakes aren’t workingproperly. You should have your vehicle servicedimmediately. See Brake System Warning Light onpage 3-34 for more information.


3-47

Service Vehicle Soon Message

This message will come on if you have engine problems.

These problems may not be obvious and may notaffect vehicle performance or durability. Consult aqualified dealership for necessary repairs to maintaintop vehicle performance.

Highbeam Out Warning Message

If this message appears, you may have a problem withyour high-beam headlamps.

The message will stay on about 60 seconds. When theignition is turned off, this message will be displayedagain for three seconds to remind you that youmay have a problem with your highbeam-headlamps.Be sure to check your bulbs right away and replacethem if necessary.

See Bulb Replacement on page 5-56.


3-48

Driver Information Center (DIC)

If your vehicle is equipped with the DIC, it will showinformation about the vehicle and the surroundings. It islocated in the headliner between the sun visors.

RESET: You can reset the AVG ECON, FUEL USEDor AVG SPEED trip computer modes by pressingand holding this button for three seconds while you arein the mode you wish to reset. A chime will sound toconfirm that your requested change has been made andall the segments of the display will briefly light up.

To change the display to a metric or English reading,press the RESET and MODE buttons at the same time.Hold them down for three seconds, and the displaywill change. A chime will be heard to confirm thenew selection.

The reset button can also be used to manually calibratethe compass. See “Manual Compass Calibration”later in this section.

The reset button can be used to set the compasszone variation. See “Compass Variance” later inthis section.

Optional Sunroof Version Shown

3-49

MODE: Press this button to cycle through three modesof operation: Off, Compass/Temperature and TripComputer mode.

• Off: No driver information is displayed in this modeof operation.

• Compass/Temperature Mode: One of eightcompass readings and the outside temperature aredisplayed. If the temperature is below 38°F(3°C), the word ICE is displayed for two minutes.

• Trip Computer: Pressing the MODE button cyclesthrough the five displays. Press the MODE buttonafter the last Trip Computer display to returnthe DIC to the OFF mode.

Compass VarianceCompass variance is the difference between magneticnorth and geographic north. In some areas of thecountry, the difference is great enough to cause thecompass to give false readings. If this occurs, thecompass variance must be set.

Setting the Variance

Turn the ignition on and cycle the DIC to theCompass/Temperature mode. Press the RESET buttonfor about five seconds. The last entered variancezone number and VAR will be displayed. Press theMODE button until the proper variance zone number onthe map is shown. Press the RESET button to setthe new variance zone and resume normal operation.

3-50

All the display segments will be illuminated briefly toacknowledge the change in zone number. A chime willsound to confirm that the new zone number hasbeen set.

Automatic Compass CalibrationThe compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates theneed to manually set the compass. When the vehicle isnew, the calibration process may not be complete. Inthese cases CAL will be displayed, and all segments ofthe compass will be illuminated where the compassreading is normally displayed.

To calibrate the compass, in an area free from largemetal objects, make one to two 360° turns. Thecalibration symbol will turn off and the compass readingwill be displayed.

Manual Compass CalibrationIf the compass appears erratic and the calibrationsymbol does not appear, you must manually put thecompass into the calibration mode.

Turn the ignition on and cycle the DIC to theCompass/Temperature mode. Press the RESET buttonfor at least 10 seconds until the calibration symbolappears and all segments of the compass display areilluminated. A chime will sound to confirm that thecalibration mode is active. Release the button andcomplete two or three 360° turns in an area free fromlarge metal objects. The calibration symbol will turnoff and the compass reading will be displayed. A chimewill sound to verify that the calibration is complete.

Error Displays• An error of the speed sensor or fuel sender will

cause -E- to be displayed.

• In the absence of vehicle communications, adash — is displayed.

If one of these error messages appear, see your dealer.

3-51

Trip ComputerThere are five trip computer displays which may bestepped through by pushing the MODE button.The information will appear in the following order:

AVG ECON (Average Fuel Economy): This shows theaverage fuel economy since the last reset.

INST ECON (Instantaneous Fuel Economy): Thisshows fuel economy for the most recent secondof driving.

RANGE (Trip Range): This shows the estimateddistance that can be traveled with the remaining fuel.The fuel economy used to calculate range is basedon the last few hours of driving. When in a lowfuel condition, LO is displayed.

FUEL USED (Trip Fuel Used): This shows theaccumulated fuel used since the last reset.

AVG SPEED (Average Speed): This shows theaverage speed since the last reset.

Resetting the Trip ComputerPress and hold the RESET button for at least threeseconds. The reset is acknowledged with all segmentsof the display lit briefly and a chime. A reset canonly be done in AVG ECON, FUEL USED and AVGSPEED displays. Each setting must be reset individually.

3-52

Audio System(s)Notice: Before you add any sound equipment toyour vehicle – like a tape player, CB radio, mobiletelephone or two-way radio – be sure you canadd what you want. If you can, it’s very important todo it properly. Added sound equipment mayinterfere with the operation of your vehicle’s engine,radio or other systems, and even damage them.Your vehicle’s systems may interfere with theoperation of sound equipment that has been addedimproperly.

So, before adding sound equipment, check withyour dealer and be sure to check federal rulescovering mobile radio and telephone units.

Your audio system has been designed to operate easilyand to give years of listening pleasure. You will getthe most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself withit first. Figure out which radio you have in your vehicle,find out what your audio system can do and how tooperate all of its controls to be sure you’re getting themost out of the advanced engineering that went into it.

Your vehicle has a feature called Retained AccessoryPower (RAP). With RAP, you can play your audiosystem even after the ignition is turned off. See“Retained Accessory Power (RAP)” under IgnitionPositions on page 2-18.

Setting the TimePress and hold the HR or MN buttons, located belowthe tune knob, for two seconds. Then press and hold HRuntil the correct hour appears on the display. AM orPM will also appear. Press and hold MN until the correctminute appears on the display. The time may be setwith the ignition on or off. The clock symbol will appearon the display in time-set mode.

To synchronize the time with an FM station broadcastingRadio Data System (RDS) information, press andhold HR and MN at the same time for two seconds untilUPDATED and the clock symbol appear on thedisplay. If the time is not available from the station, NOUPDAT will appear on the display instead.

3-53

Radio with Cassette

Radio Data System (RDS)Your audio system is equipped with a Radio DataSystem (RDS). RDS features are available for use onlyon FM stations that broadcast RDS information.

With RDS, your radio can do the following:

• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type ofprogramming

• Receive announcements concerning local andnational emergencies

• Display messages from radio stations

• Seek to stations with traffic announcements

This system relies upon receiving specific informationfrom these stations and will only work when theinformation is available. In rare cases, a radio stationmay broadcast incorrect information that will causethe radio features to work improperly. If this happens,contact the radio station.

While you are tuned to an RDS station, the stationname or the call letters will appear on the display insteadof the frequency. RDS stations may also provide thetime of day, a program type (PTY) for currentprogramming, and the name of the program beingbroadcast.

XM™ Radio Satellite Service(USA Only)XM™ is a continental U.S. based satellite radio servicethat offers 100 coast to coast channels includingmusic, news, sports, talk, and children’s programming.XM™ provides digital quality audio and text information,including song title and artist name. A service fee isrequired in order to receive the XM™ service. For moreinformation, contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com orcall 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

3-54

Playing the Radio

PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system onand off.

VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or todecrease volume.

AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automaticvolume, your audio system adjusts automaticallyto make up for road and wind noise as you drive.

Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button toselect LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. AVOL will appearon the display. Each higher setting will allow for morevolume compensation at faster vehicle speeds. Then asyou drive, automatic volume increases the volume asnecessary to overcome noise at any speed. The volumelevel should always sound the same to you as youdrive. NONE will appear on the display if the radiocannot determine the vehicle speed. If you don’t want touse automatic volume, select OFF.

DISPL (Display): For RDS, press this knob to changewhat appears on the display while using RDS. Thedisplay options are station name, RDS station frequency,PTY and the name of the program (if available).

For XM™ (USA only, if equipped), press this buttonwhile in XM mode to retrieve four different categories ofinformation related to the current song or channel:Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, ChannelNumber/Channel Name.

To change the default on the display, press the knobuntil you see the display you want, then hold theknob for two seconds. The radio will produce one beepand selected display will now be the default.

3-55

Finding a Station

BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,AM, or XM1 or XM2 (USA only, if equipped). Thedisplay will show your selection.

TUNE: Turn this knob to choose radio stations.

q SEEKr: Press the right or the left arrow to seekto the next or to the previous station and stay there.

The radio will seek only to stations that are in theselected band and only to those with a strong signal.

q PSCAN (Preset Scan) r: Press and hold one ofthe arrows for more than two seconds and the radiowill produce one beep. The radio will scan to thefirst preset station stored on your pushbuttons, play fora few seconds, then go on to the next preset station.SCAN will appear on the display. Press one of thearrows again or one of the pushbuttons to stop scanningpresets.

The radio will scan only to the preset stations thatare in the selected band and only to those with astrong signal.

Setting Preset StationsThe six numbered pushbuttons let you return to yourfavorite stations. You can set up to 30 stations (six FM1,six FM2, and six AM, six XM1 and six XM2 (USAonly, if equipped), by performing the following steps:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1or XM2.

3. Tune in the desired station.

4. Press AUTO TONE to choose the bass and trebleequalization that best suits the type of station youare listening to.

5. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons. The radio will produce one beep.Whenever you press that numbered pushbutton, thestation you set will return and the bass and trebleequalization that you selected will also beautomatically selected for that pushbutton.

6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

3-56

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knob until BASSor TREB appears on the display. Then turn the knobto increase or to decrease. The display will showthe bass or the treble level. If a station is weak or noisy,you may want to decrease the treble.

To adjust bass and treble to the middle position,push and hold the AUDIO knob. The radio will produceone beep and adjust the display level to themiddle position.

To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middleposition, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no toneor speaker control is displayed. The radio will produceone beep and display ALL. The bass and the treble willbe adjusted to the middle position.

AUTO TONE (Automatic Tone): Press this button tochoose bass and treble equalization settings designedfor country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and classicalstations.

To return the bass and treble to the manual mode,push and release the AUDIO knob until MANUALis displayed.

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the rightand the left speakers, push and release the AUDIOknob until BAL appears on the display. Turn the knob tomove the sound toward the right or the left speakers.

To adjust the fade between the front and the rearspeakers, push and release the AUDIO knob until FADEappears on the display. Turn the knob to move thesound toward the front or the rear speakers.

To adjust the balance and the fade to the middleposition, push the AUDIO knob, then push it again andhold it until you hear one beep. The balance and thefade will be adjusted to the middle position and thedisplay will show the speaker balance.

To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middleposition, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no toneor speaker control is displayed. The radio will produceone beep and display ALL with the level display inthe middle position.

3-57

Finding a PTY Station (RDS and XM™)To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:

1. Press the P-TYPE knob. TYPE and a PTY willappear on the display.

2. Select a category by turning the P-TYPE knob.

3. Once the desired category is displayed, press theSEEK TYPE button to take you to the category’sfirst station.

4. If you want to go to another station within thatcategory and the category is displayed, pressthe SEEK TYPE button once. If the category is notdisplayed, press the SEEK TYPE button twiceto display the category and then to go toanother station.

If the radio cannot find the desired program type, NONEwill appear on the display and the radio will return tothe last station you were listening to.

BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequencyallows the radio to switch to a stronger station with thesame program type. Press and hold BAND for twoseconds to turn alternate frequency on. AF ONwill appear on the display. The radio may switch tostronger stations. Press and hold BAND again for twoseconds to turn alternate frequency off. AF OFFwill appear on the display. The radio will not switch toother stations.

This function does not apply for XM™ SatelliteRadio Service.

RDS Messages

ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.When an alert announcement comes on the currentradio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You willhear the announcement, even if the volume is mutedor a cassette tape is playing. If the cassette tape playeris playing, play will stop during the announcement.You will not be able to turn off alert announcements.

ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergencybroadcast system. This feature is not supported byall RDS stations.

3-58

INFO (Information): If the current station has amessage, INFO will appear on the display. Press thisbutton to see the message. The message may displaythe artist and song title, call in phone numbers, etc.

If the whole message is not displayed, parts of itwill appear every three seconds. To scroll through themessage at your own speed, press the INFO buttonrepeatedly. A new group of words will appear onthe display with each press. Once the completemessage has been displayed, INFO will disappear fromthe display until another new message is received.The old message can be displayed by pressingthe INFO button until a new message is received or adifferent station is tuned to.

When a message is not available from a station, NOINFO will be displayed.

TRAF (Traffic): If TRAF appears on the display, thetuned station broadcasts traffic announcementsand when a traffic announcement comes on the tunedradio station you will hear it.

If the current tuned station does not broadcast trafficannouncements, press this button and the radio will seekto a station that does. When the radio finds a station thatbroadcasts traffic announcements, it will stop and TRAF

will be displayed. When a traffic announcement come onthe tuned radio station you will hear it. If no station isfound, NO TRAF will appear on the display.

If TRAF is on the display you can press the TRAF buttonto turn off the traffic announcements.

Your radio will play the traffic announcement even if thevolume is muted or interrupt the play of a cassette tape ifthe last tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements.

This function does not apply to XM™ SatelliteRadio Service.

Radio Messages

CAL ERR (Calibration Error): This message isdisplayed when the radio has not been calibratedproperly for the vehicle. You must return to thedealership for service.

LOCKED: This message is displayed when theTHEFTLOCK® system has locked up. You must returnto the dealership for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can not becorrected, contact your dealer.

3-59

XM™ Radio MessagesRadio Display

Message Condition Action Required

XL (Explicit LanguageChannels)

XL on the radio display,after the channel name,indicates content withexplicit language.

These channels, or any others, can be blocked at acustomer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

Updating Updating encryptioncode

The encryption code in your receiver is being updated, andno action is required. This process should take no longerthan 30 seconds.

No Signl Loss of signal Your system is functioning correctly, but you are in alocation that is blocking the XM signal. When you moveinto an open area, the signal should return.

Loading Acquiring channel audio(after 4 second delay)

Your radio system is acquiring and processing audio andtext data. No action is needed. This message shoulddisappear shortly.

Off Air Channel not in service This channel is not currently in service. Tune to anotherchannel.

CH Unavl Channel no longeravailable

This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.Tune to another station. If this station was one of yourpresets, you may need to choose another station for thatpreset button.

No Info Artist Name/Feature notavailable

No artist information is available at this time on thischannel. Your system is working properly.

No Info Song/Program Title notavailable

No song title information is available at this time on thischannel. Your system is working properly.

3-60

XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)Radio Display


No Info Category Name notavailable

No category information is available at this time on thischannel. Your system is working properly.

No Info No Text/Informationalmessage available

No text or informational messages are available at thistime on this channel. Your system is working properly.

Not Found No channel available forthe chosen category

There are no channels available for the category youselected. Your system is working properly.

XM Lock Theft lock active The XM receiver in your vehicle may have previously beenin another vehicle. For security purposes, XM receiverscannot be swapped between vehicles. If you receive thismessage after having your vehicle serviced, check with theservicing facility.

Radio ID Radio ID label(channel 0)

If you tune to channel 0, you will see this messagealternating with your XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label. Thislabel is needed to activate your service.

Unknown Radio ID not known(should only be ifhardware failure)

If you receive this message when you tune to channel 0,you may have a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer.

Check XM Hardware failure If this message does not clear within a short period of time,your receiver may have a fault. Consult with your retaillocation.

3-61

Playing a Cassette TapeYour tape player is built to work best with tapes that areup to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapeslonger than that are so thin they may not work well inthis player. The longer side with the tape visible shouldface to the right. If the ignition is on and the radio isoff, the tape can be inserted and will begin playing. Atape symbol is shown on the display whenever a tape isinserted. If you hear nothing but a garbled sound, thetape may not be in squarely. Press EJT to removethe tape and start over. If you want to insert a tape whilethe ignition is off, first press EJT or DISPL.While the tape is playing, use VOL, TUNE, SEEK, andPSCAN controls just as you do for the radio. Theradio will display TAPE and an arrow showing whichside of the tape is playing.If an error appears on the display, see “Cassette TapeMessages” later in this section.1 PREV (Previous): Your tape must have at least threeseconds of silence between each selection for previousto work. Press this pushbutton to go to the previousselection on the tape if the current selection has beenplaying for less than three seconds. If pressed when thecurrent selection has been playing from 3 to 13 seconds,it will go to the beginning of the previous selection orthe beginning of the current selection, depending uponthe position on the tape. If pressed when the currentselection has been playing for more than 13 seconds, itwill go to the beginning of the current selection.

SEEK and a negative number will appear on the displaywhile the cassette player is in the previous mode.Pressing this pushbutton multiple times will increase thenumber of selections to be searched back, up to -9.2 NEXT: Your tape must have at least three seconds ofsilence between each selection for next to work.Press this pushbutton to go to the next selection on thetape. If you press this pushbutton more than once,the player will continue moving forward through the tape.SEEK and a positive number will appear on thedisplay. To forward through each selection press theright SEEK arrow.3 REV (Reverse): Press this pushbutton to reverse thetape rapidly. Press it again to return to playing speed.The radio will play while the tape reverses. Thestation frequency and REV will appear on the display.You may select stations during reverse operationusing TUNE and the SEEK arrows.4 FWD (Forward): Press this pushbutton to advancequickly. Press the pushbutton again to return to playingspeed. The radio will play while the tape advances.The station frequency and FWD will appear onthe display. You may select stations during forwardoperation using TUNE and the SEEK arrows.

5 X SIDE: Press this pushbutton to play the other sideof the tape.

q SEEKr: If the right or the left arrow is held or

3-62

pressed more than once, the player will continuemoving forward or backward through the tape. SEEKand a positive or a negative number will appear on thedisplay.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when atape is playing. The tape will stop but remain in theplayer.

TAPE AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play acassette tape when listening to the radio.

Z EJT (Eject): Press this button to eject a tape.Eject may be activated with the radio off. Cassette tapesmay be loaded with the radio off if this button ispressed first.

Cassette Tape Messages

CHK TAPE (Check Tape): If this message appears onthe radio display, the tape won’t play because of oneof the following errors.

• The tape is tight and the player can’t turn the tapehubs. Remove the tape. Hold the tape with theopen end down and try to turn the right hubcounterclockwise with a pencil. Turn the tape overand repeat. If the hubs do not turn easily, yourtape may be damaged and should not be used inthe player. Try a new tape to make sure your playeris working properly.

• The tape is broken. Try a new tape.

• The tape is wrapped around the tape head. Attemptto get the cassette out. Try a new tape.

CLEAN: If this message appears on the display, thecassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still playtapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible toprevent damage to the tapes and player. See Careof Your Cassette Tape Player on page 3-91.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t becorrected, contact your dealer.

CD Adapter KitsIt is possible to use a portable CD player adapter kitwith your cassette tape player after activating the bypassfeature on your tape player.

To activate the bypass feature, use the following steps:

1. Turn the radio off.

2. Press and hold the TAPE AUX button for fiveseconds. READY will appear on the display forfive seconds, indicating the feature is active.

3. Insert the adapter into the cassette slot. It willpower up the radio and begin playing.

The override feature will remain active until EJTis pressed.

3-63

Radio with CD









XM™ Radio Satellite Service (USAOnly)XM™ is a continental U.S. based satellite radio servicethat offers 100 coast to coast channels includingmusic, news, sports, talk, and children’s programming.XM™ provides digital quality audio and text information,including song title and artist name. A service fee isrequired in order to receive the XM™ service. For moreinformation, contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com orcall 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

3-64

Playing the Radio






For XM™ (USA only, if equipped), press this buttonwhile in XM mode to retrieve four different categories ofinformation related to the current song or channel:Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, ChannelNumber/Channel Name.


3-65

Finding a Station





q PSCAN (Preset Scan) r: Press and hold one ofthe arrows for more than two seconds and the radiowill produce one beep. The radio will scan to thefirst preset station stored on the pushbuttons, play for afew seconds and flash the station frequency, then goon to the next preset station. SCAN will be displayed.Press one of the arrows again or one of the pushbuttonsto stop scanning presets.

The radio will scan only to the preset stations thatare in the selected band and only to those with astrong signal.



2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1 orXM2.





3-66


AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knob until BASSor TREB appears on the display. Turn the knob toincrease or to decrease. The display will show the bassor the treble level. If a station is weak or noisy, youmay want to decrease the treble.

To adjust the bass and the treble to the middle position,push and hold the AUDIO knob. The radio will produceone beep and adjust the display level to themiddle position.

To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middleposition, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no toneor speaker control is displayed. You will hear onebeep and the radio will display ALL. The bass and thetreble will be adjusted to the middle position.

AUTO TONE (Automatic Tone): Press this button tochoose bass and treble equalization settings designedfor country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and classicalstations.

To return the bass and treble to the manual mode,push and release the AUDIO knob until MANUALis displayed.



To adjust the fade, push and release the AUDIOknob until FADE appears on the display. Turn theknob to move the sound toward the front or therear speakers.

To adjust the balance and the fade to the middleposition, push the AUDIO knob, then push it again andhold it until you hear one beep. The balance and thefade will be adjusted to the middle position and thedisplay will show the speaker balance.


3-67





4. If you want to go to another station within thatcategory and the category is displayed, pressthe SEEK TYPE button once. If the category is notdisplayed, press the SEEK TYPE button twiceto display the category and then to go toanother station.




3-68

RDS Messages

ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.When an alert announcement comes on the currentradio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You willhear the announcement, even if the volume is mutedor a compact disc is playing. If the compact disc playeris playing, play will stop during the announcement.You will not be able to turn off alert announcements.


INFO (Information): If the current station has amessage, the information symbol will appear on thedisplay. Press this button to see the message. Themessage may display the artist and song title, call inphone numbers, etc.

If the whole message is not displayed, parts of it willappear every three seconds. To scroll through themessage at your own speed, press the INFO buttonrepeatedly. A new group of words will appear onthe display with each press. Once the completemessage has been displayed, the information symbolwill disappear from the display until another newmessage is received. The old message can be displayedby pressing the INFO button until a new message isreceived or a different station is tuned to.


3-69


If the current tuned station does not broadcast trafficannouncements, press this button and the radiowill seek to a station that does. When the radio finds astation that broadcasts trafiic announcements, it willstop and TRAF will be displayed. When a trafficannouncement comes on the tuned radio station youwill hear it. If no station is found, NO TRAF will appearon the display.

If TRAF is on the display you can press the TRAFbutton to turn of the traffic announcements.

Your radio will play the traffic announcement even if thevolume is muted or interrupt the play of a CD if thelast tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements.

This function does not apply to XM™ SatelliteRadio Service.

Radio Messages




3-70


















3-71















3-72

Playing a Compact DiscInsert a disc partway into the slot, label side up. Theplayer will pull it in and the disc should begin playing.The display will show the CD symbol. If you wantto insert a compact disc with the ignition off, first pressDISPL or EJT.

The integral CD player can play the smaller 8 cm singlediscs with an adapter ring. Full-size compact discsand the smaller discs are loaded in the same manner.

If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced dueto CD-R quality, the method of recording, the qualityof the music that has been recorded, and the way theCD-R has been handled. You may experience anincrease in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/ordifficulty in loading and ejecting. If these problems occurtry a known good CD.

Do not add paper labels to discs, they could get caughtin the CD player.

Do not play 3 inch discs without a standard adapterdisc.

If an error appears on the display, see “Compact DiscMessages” later in this section.

1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to theprevious track if the current track has been playingfor less than eight seconds. If pressed when the currenttrack has been playing for more than eight seconds,it will go to the beginning of the current track. TRACKand the track number will appear on the display. Ifyou hold this pushbutton or press it more than once, theplayer will continue moving back through the disc.

2 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next track.TRACK and the track number will appear on thedisplay. If you hold this pushbutton or press it more thanonce, the player will continue moving forward throughthe disc.

3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton toreverse quickly within a track. Press and hold thispushbutton for less than two seconds to reverse at sixtimes the normal playing speed. Press and hold itfor more than two seconds to reverse at 17 times thenormal playing speed. Release it to play the track. Thedisplay will show ET and the elapsed time.

4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton toadvance quickly within a track. Press and hold thispushbutton for less than two seconds to advance at sixtimes the normal playing speed. Press and hold it formore than two seconds to advance at 17 times thenormal playing speed. Release it to play the track. Thedisplay will show ET and the elapsed time.

3-73

6 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear thetracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM ONwill appear on the display. RDM T and the tracknumber will appear on the display when each trackstarts to play. Press RDM again to turn off random play.RDM OFF will appear on the display.

q SEEKr: Press the left arrow to go to the start ofthe current or of the previous track. Press the rightarrow to go to the start of the next track. If either of thearrows is held or pressed more than once, the playerwill continue moving backward or forward throughthe CD.

DISPL (Display): Press this knob to see how long thecurrent track has been playing. ET and the elapsedtime will appear on the display. To change the defaulton the display (track or elapsed time), press theknob until you see the display you want, then hold theknob for two seconds. The radio will produce onebeep and selected display will now be the default.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when aCD is playing. The CD will stop but remain in the player.

CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CDwhen listening to the radio.

Z EJT (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD. Ejectmay be activated with either the ignition or radio off.CDs may be loaded with the radio and ignition off if thisbutton is pressed first.

3-74

Compact Disc MessagesIf the disc comes out or CHECK CD appears on thedisplay, it could be for one of the following reasons:

• You’re driving on a very rough road. When the roadbecomes smoother, the disc should play.

• It’s very hot. When the temperature returns tonormal, the disc should play.

• The disc is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour andtry again.

• There may have been a problem while burning theCD.

• The label may be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,try a known good CD.


Radio with Cassette and CD


3-75








XM™ Radio Satellite Service(USA Only)XM™ is a continental U.S. based satellite radio servicethat offers 100 coast to coast channels includingmusic, news, sports, talk, and children’s programming.XM™ provides digital quality audio and text information,including song title and artist name. A service fee isrequired in order to receive the XM™ service. For moreinformation, contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com orcall 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

3-76

Playing the Radio






For XM™ (USA only, if equipped), press this buttonwhile in XM™ mode to retrieve four different categoriesof information related to the current song or channel:Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, ChannelNumber/Channel Name.


3-77

Finding a Station





q PSCAN (Preset Scan) r: Press and hold one ofthe arrows for more than two seconds. The radio willproduce one beep. The radio will scan through each ofthe preset stations stored on the pushbuttons, playfor a few seconds, then go on to the next preset station.SCAN will be displayed. Press one of the arrows again orone of the pushbuttons to stop scanning presets.

The radio will scan only to the preset stations that arein the selected band and only to those with astrong signal.



2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1 orXM2.





3-78


AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knob until BASSor TREB appears on the display. Turn the knob toincrease or to decrease. The display will show the bassor the treble level. If a station is weak or noisy, youmay want to decrease the treble.

To adjust bass and treble to the middle position, pushand hold the AUDIO knob. The radio will produceone beep and adjust the display level to the middleposition.


AUTO TONE (Automatic Tone): Press this button tochoose bass and treble equalization settings designedfor country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock and classicalstations.

To return the bass and treble to the manual mode, pushand release the AUDIO knob until MANUAL is displayed.



To adjust the fade between the front and the rearspeakers, push and release the AUDIO knob until FADEappears on the display. Turn the knob to move thesound toward the front or the rear speakers.

To adjust the balance and fade to the middle position,push the AUDIO knob then push it again and hold it untilyou hear one beep. The balance and the fade will beadjusted to the middle position and the display will showthe speaker balance.


3-79





4. If you want to go to another station within thatcategory and the category is displayed, pressthe SEEK TYPE button once. If the category is notdisplayed, press the SEEK TYPE button twiceto display the category and then to go to anotherstation.




3-80

RDS Messages

ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.When an alert announcement comes on the currentradio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You willhear the announcement, even if the volume is mutedor a cassette tape or compact disc is playing. If thecassette tape or compact disc player is playing, play willstop during the announcement. You will not be ableto turn off alert announcements.


INFO (Information): If the current station has amessage, the information symbol will appear on thedisplay. Press this button to see the message. Themessage may display the artist and song title, call inphone numbers, etc.

If the whole message is not displayed, parts of it willappear every three seconds. To scroll through themessage at your own speed, press the INFO buttonrepeatedly. A new group of words will appear onthe display with each press. Once the completemessage has been displayed, the information symbolwill disappear from the display until another newmessage is received. The old message can be displayedby pressing the INFO button until a new message isreceived or a different station is tuned to.


3-81


If the current tuned station does not broadcast trafficannouncements, press this button and the radiowill seek to a station that does. When the radio finds astation that broadcasts traffic announcements, it willstop and TRAF will be displayed. When a trafficannouncement comes on the tuned radio station youwill hear it. If no station is found, NO TRAF will appearon the display.

If TRAF is on the display you can press the TRAFbutton to turn of the traffic announcements.

Your radio will play the traffic announcement even if thevolume is muted or interrupt the play of a cassettetape or CD if the last tuned station broadcasts trafficannouncements.

This function does not apply to XM™ Satellite RadioService.

Radio Messages




3-82


















3-83















3-84

Playing a Cassette TapeYour tape player is built to work best with tapes that areup to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapeslonger than that are so thin they may not work well inthis player. The longer side with the tape visible shouldface to the right. If the ignition is on, but the radio isoff, the tape can be inserted and will begin playing. Atape symbol is shown on the display whenever a tape isinserted. If you hear nothing but a garbled sound, thetape may not be in squarely. Press EJT to removethe tape and start over.

While the tape is playing, use the VOL, AUDIO, andSEEK controls just as you do for the radio. The displaywill show TAPE and an arrow showing which side ofthe tape is playing.

If you want to insert a tape while the ignition is off, firstpress EJT or DISPL.

If an error appears on the display, see “Cassette TapeMessages” later in this section.

1 PREV (Previous): Your tape must have at least threeseconds of silence between each selection for previousto work. Press this pushbutton to go to the previousselection on the tape if the current selection has beenplaying for less than three seconds. If pressed when thecurrent selection has been playing from 3 to 13 seconds,it will go to the beginning of the previous selection orthe beginning of the current selection, depending upon

the position on the tape. If pressed when the currentselection has been playing for more than 13 seconds, itwill go to the beginning of the current selection.

SEEK and a negative number will appear on the displaywhile the cassette player is in the previous mode.Pressing this pushbutton multiple times or holding it willincrease the number of selections to be searchedback, up to -9.

2 NEXT: Your tape must have at least three seconds ofsilence between each selection for next to work.Press this pushbutton to go to the next selection on thetape. If you press the pushbutton more than once,the player will continue moving forward through the tape.SEEK and a positive number will appear on thedisplay.

3 REV (Reverse): Press this pushbutton to reverse thetape rapidly. Press it again to return to playing speed.The radio will play while the tape reverses. Thestation frequency and REV will appear on the display.You may select stations during reverse operationusing TUNE, SEEK, or PSCAN.

4 FWD (Forward): Press this pushbutton to advancequickly. Press this pushbutton again to return to playingspeed. The radio will play while the tape advances.The station frequency and FWD will appear onthe display. You may select stations during forwardoperation by using TUNE, SEEK, or PSCAN.

3-85

5X SIDE: Press this pushbutton to play the other sideof the tape.

q SEEKr: The right arrow is the same as theNEXT pushbutton, and the left arrow is the same as thePREV pushbutton. If the arrows are held or pressedmore than once, the player will continue moving forwardor backward through the tape. SEEK and a positiveor a negative number will appear on the display.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio whena tape is playing. The tape will stop but remain inthe player.

TAPE CD: Press this button to play a tape whenlistening to the radio. Press TAPE CD to switch betweenthe tape and compact disc if both are loaded. Theinactive tape or CD will remain safely inside the radiofor future listening.

Z EJT (Eject): Press this button, located to the rightof the cassette tape slot, to eject a tape. Eject maybe activated with the radio off. Cassette tapes may beloaded with the radio off if this button is pressed first.

Cassette Tape Messages

CHK TAPE (Check Tape): If this message appears onthe radio display, the tape won’t play because of oneof the following errors.

• The tape is tight and the player can’t turn the tapehubs. Remove the tape. Hold the tape with theopen end down and try to turn the right hubcounterclockwise with a pencil. Turn the tape overand repeat. If the hubs do not turn easily, yourtape may be damaged and should not be used inthe player. Try a new tape to make sure your playeris working properly.

• The tape is broken. Try a new tape.

• The tape is wrapped around the tape head. Attemptto get the cassette out. Try a new tape.

CLEAN: If this message appears on the display, thecassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still playtapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible toprevent damage to the tapes and player. See Careof Your Cassette Tape Player on page 3-91.


3-86

CD Adapter KitsIt is possible to use a portable CD player adapter kitwith your cassette tape player after disabling thetight/loose tape sensing feature on your tape player.

To disable the feature, use the following steps:

1. Turn the ignition on.


3. Press and hold the TAPE CD button. The radio willdisplay READY and flash the cassette symbol.

4. Insert the adapter into the cassette slot. It willpower up the radio and begin playing.

The override feature will remain active until EJT ispressed.

Playing a Compact DiscInsert a disc partway into the slot, label side up. Theplayer will pull it in and the disc should begin playing.The display will show the CD symbol. If you wantto insert a compact disc with the ignition off, first pressDISPL or EJT.

The integral CD player can play the smaller 8 cm singlediscs with an adapter ring. Full-size compact discsand the smaller discs are loaded in the same manner.

If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced dueto CD-R quality, the method of recording, the qualityof the music that has been recorded, and the way theCD-R has been handled. You may experience anincrease in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/ordifficulty in loading and ejecting. If these problems occurtry a known good CD.

Do not add paper labels to discs, they could get caughtin the CD player.

Do not play 3 inch discs without a standard adapterdisc.

If an error appears on the display, see “Compact DiscMessages” later in this section.

3-87

1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to theprevious track if the current track has been playingfor less than eight seconds. If pressed when the currenttrack has been playing for more than eight seconds,it will go to the beginning of the current track. TRACKand the track number will appear on the display. Ifyou hold this pushbutton or press it more than once, theplayer will continue moving back through the disc.

2 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next track.TRACK. The track number will appear on the display.If you hold this pushbutton or press it more than once,the player will continue moving forward throughthe disc.

3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton toreverse quickly within a track. Press and hold thispushbutton for less than two seconds to reverse at sixtimes the normal playing speed. Press and hold itfor more than two seconds to reverse at 17 times thenormal playing speed. Release it to play the passage.The display will show ET and the elapsed time.

4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton toadvance quickly within a track. Press and hold thispushbutton for less than two seconds to advance at sixtimes the normal playing speed. Press and hold it formore than two seconds to advance at 17 times thenormal playing speed. Release it to play the passage.The display will show ET and the elapsed time.

6 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear thetracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM ONwill appear on the display. RDM T and the tracknumber will appear on the display when each trackstarts to play. Press it again to turn off random play.RDM OFF will appear on the display.

q SEEKr: The right arrow is the same as theNEXT pushbutton, and the left arrow is the same as thePREV pushbutton. If either of the SEEK arrows isheld or pressed more than once, the player will continuemoving backward or forward through the CD.

DISPL (Display): Press this knob to see how long thecurrent track has been playing. ET and the elapsedtime will appear on the display. To change the defaulton the display (track or elapsed time), press theknob until you see the display you want, then hold theknob for two seconds. The radio will produce onebeep and selected display will now be the default.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio whena disc is playing. The disc will stop but remain inthe player.

TAPE CD: Press this button to play a CD whenlistening to the radio. Press TAPE CD to switch betweenthe tape and compact disc if both are loaded. Theinactive tape or CD will remain safely inside the radiofor future listening.

3-88

Z EJT (Eject): Press this button, located to the rightof the CD slot, to eject a CD. Eject may be activatedwith either the ignition or radio off. CDs may be loadedwith the radio and ignition off if this button is pressedfirst.

Compact Disc MessagesIf the disc comes out or CHECK CD appears on thedisplay, it could be for one of the following reasons:

• You’re driving on a very rough road. When the roadbecomes smoother, the disc should play.

• It’s very hot. When the temperature returns tonormal, the disc should play.

• The disc is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.

• It is very humid. If so, wait about an hour andtry again.

• There may have been a problem while burning theCD.

• The label may be caught in the CD player.


Theft-Deterrent FeatureTHEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of yourradio. The feature works automatically by learninga portion of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). Ifthe radio is moved to a different vehicle, it will notoperate and LOCKED will be displayed.

When the ignition is off and RAP is not active, theblinking red light indicates that THEFTLOCK is armed.

With THEFTLOCK activated, your radio will notoperate if stolen.

3-89

Audio Steering Wheel ControlsIf your vehicle has this feature, you can control certainradio functions using the buttons on your steeringwheel.

Q SEEKR: Press the up or the down arrow to seekto the next or to the previous radio station.

If a cassette tape or compact disc is playing, the playerwill advance with the up arrow and reverse with thedown arrow. Holding SEEK for three seconds or morewill activate the PSCAN mode.

SEEK TYPE: Press this button to go to a station withthe last selected PTY TYPE and the last selectedPTY will appear on the display, if it is not alreadyshowing. If a station with the selected PTY is not found,the radio will return to the original station. If bothSEEK by TYPE and TRAF are on, the radio will searchfor stations with the selected PTY and trafficannouncements.

PRESET: Press this button to play a station you haveprogrammed on the radio preset pushbuttons.

MODE: Press this button to choose AM, FM1, FM2, orXM1, or XM2, (USA only, if equipped). If a cassettetape or compact disc is playing, it will stop and the radiowill play.

MUTE: Press this button to silence the system. Press itagain to turn on the sound.

Q VOL (Volume)R: Press the up or the down arrowto increase or to decrease volume.

3-90

Understanding Radio Reception

AMThe range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,especially at night. The longer range, however, cancause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pickup noise from things like storms and power lines. Tryreducing the treble to reduce this noise if you ever get it.

FM StereoFM stereo will give you the best sound, but FM signalswill reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,causing the sound to come and go.

XM™ Satellite Radio Service(USA Only)XM™ Satellite Radio gives you digital radio receptionfrom coast to coast. Just as with FM, tall buildingsor hills can interfere with satellite radio signals, causingthe sound to come and go. Your radio may displayNO SIGNAL to indicate interference.

Care of Your Cassette Tape PlayerA tape player that is not cleaned regularly can causereduced sound quality, ruined cassettes or a damagedmechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in theircases away from contaminants, direct sunlight andextreme heat. If they aren’t, they may not operateproperly or may cause failure of the tape player.

Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every50 hours of use. Your radio may display CLEAN toindicate that you have used your tape player for50 hours without resetting the tape clean timer. If thismessage appears on the display, your cassettetape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play tapes,but you should clean it as soon as possible toprevent damage to your tapes and player. If you noticea reduction in sound quality, try a known goodcassette to see if the tape or the tape player is at fault.If this other cassette has no improvement in soundquality, clean the tape player.

For best results, use a scrubbing action, non-abrasivecleaning cassette with pads which scrub the tapehead as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn. Therecommended cleaning cassette is available throughyour dealership.

3-91

The broken tape detection feature of your cassette tapeplayer may identify the cleaning cassette as adamaged tape, in error. To prevent the cleaning cassettefrom being ejected, use the following steps:

1. Turn the ignition on.


3. Press and hold the TAPE CD button for fiveseconds. READY will appear on the display and acassette symbol will flash for five seconds.

4. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette.

5. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer’srecommended cleaning time.

After the cleaning cassette is ejected, the broken tapedetection feature will be active again.

You may also choose a non-scrubbing action, wet-typecleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt toclean the tape head. This type of cleaning cassette willnot eject on its own. A non-scrubbing action cleanermay not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing typecleaner. The use of a non-scrubbing action, dry-typecleaning cassette is not recommended.

After you clean the player, press and hold the EJTbutton for five seconds to reset the CLEAN indicator.The radio will display CLEANED to show the indicatorwas reset.

Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound qualitymay degrade over time. Always make sure the cassettetape is in good condition before you have your tapeplayer serviced.

Care of Your CDsHandle discs carefully. Store them in their original casesor other protective cases and away from direct sunlightand dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampena clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solutionand clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.

Be sure never to touch the side without writing whenhandling discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outeredges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge.

Care of Your CD PlayerThe use of CD lens cleaner discs is not advised, due tothe risk of contaminating the lens of the CD opticswith lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.

3-92

Backglass AntennaThe AM-FM antenna is integrated with the rear windowdefogger, located in the rear window. Be sure thatthe inside surface of the rear window is not scratchedand that the lines on the glass are not damaged. Ifthe inside surface is damaged, it could interferewith radio reception. Also, for proper radio reception, theantenna connector at the top-center of the rear windowneeds to be properly attached to the post on theglass.

Notice: Do not try to clear frost or other materialfrom the inside of the rear window with a razor bladeor anything else that is sharp. This may damagethe rear defogger grid and affect your radio’s abilityto pick up stations clearly. The repairs wouldn’tbe covered by your warranty.

Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting withmetallic film. The metallic film in some tintingmaterials will interfere with or distort the incomingradio reception. Any damage caused to yourbackglass antenna due to metallic tinting materialswill not be covered by your warranty.

Because this antenna is built into your rear window,there is a reduced risk of damage caused by car washesand vandals.

If you choose to add a cellular telephone to yourvehicle, and the antenna needs to be attached to theglass, be sure that you do not damage the grid lines forthe AM-FM antenna. There is enough space betweenthe lines to attach a cellular telephone antennawithout interfering with radio reception

Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting to the back glass.The metallic film in some tinting materials will interferewith or distort the incoming radio reception. Caremust be taken when cleaning the rear window becauseit breaks in the resistive material heating elementand will adversely affect radio and defoggerperformance. See your dealer for details.

3-93

XM™ Satellite Radio AntennaSystem (United States Only)Your XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on theroof of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear ofsnow and ice build up for clear radio reception.

The performance of your XM system may be affected ifyour sunroof is open.

Vehicle Customization SettingsYour audio system can be used to control vehiclecustomization settings using the DISP button when theradio is off. See Vehicle Personalization on page 2-45for more information.

Chime Level AdjustmentThe radio is the vehicle chime producer. To change thevolume level, press and hold pushbutton 6 with theignition on and the radio power off. The chime volumelevel will change from the normal level to loud, andLOUD will be displayed on the radio. To change back tothe default or normal setting, press and holdpushbutton 6 again. The chime level will change fromthe loud level to normal, and NORMAL will be displayed.Each time the chime volume is changed, three chimeswill sound as an example of the new volume selected.Removing the radio and not replacing it with afactory radio or chime module will disable vehiclechimes.

3-94

Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..........4-2Defensive Driving ...........................................4-2Drunken Driving .............................................4-2Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-5Braking .........................................................4-6Traction Control System (TCS) (3800 V6

Engine) .....................................................4-9Steering ......................................................4-10Off-Road Recovery .......................................4-12Passing .......................................................4-13Loss of Control .............................................4-14Driving at Night ............................................4-16Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-17

City Driving ..................................................4-20Freeway Driving ...........................................4-21Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-22Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-23Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-23Winter Driving ..............................................4-25If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ...4-30

Towing ..........................................................4-31Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-31Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-31Loading Your Vehicle ....................................4-32Towing a Trailer ...........................................4-34

Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle

4-1

Your Driving, the Road, andYour Vehicle

Defensive DrivingThe best advice anyone can give about driving is: Drivedefensively.

Please start with a very important safety device in yourvehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are forEveryone on page 1-9.

Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means“always expect the unexpected.”

Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going tobe careless and make mistakes. Anticipate whatthey might do. Be ready for their mistakes.

Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable ofaccidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough followingdistance. It’s the best defensive driving maneuver, inboth city and rural driving. You never know whenthe vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turnsuddenly.

Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate onthe driving task. Anything that distracts from thedriving task — such as concentrating on a cellulartelephone call, reading, or reaching for something

on the floor — makes proper defensive driving moredifficult and can even cause a collision, with resultinginjury. Ask a passenger to help do things like this, orpull off the road in a safe place to do them yourself.These simple defensive driving techniques could saveyour life.

Drunken DrivingDeath and injury associated with drinking and driving isa national tragedy. It’s the number one contributor tothe highway death toll, claiming thousands of victimsevery year.

Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive avehicle:

• Judgment

• Muscular Coordination

• Vision

• Attentiveness.

Police records show that almost half of all motorvehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,these deaths are the result of someone who wasdrinking and driving. In recent years, more than16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have beenassociated with the use of alcohol, with more than300,000 people injured.

4-2

Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the adultpopulation — choose never to drink alcohol, so theynever drive after drinking. For persons under 21,it’s against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.There are good medical, psychological anddevelopmental reasons for these laws.

The obvious way to eliminate the leading highwaysafety problem is for people never to drink alcohol andthen drive. But what if people do? How much is “toomuch” if someone plans to drive? It’s a lot lessthan many might think. Although it depends on eachperson and situation, here is some general informationon the problem.

The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someonewho is drinking depends upon four things:

• The amount of alcohol consumed

• The drinker’s body weight

• The amount of food that is consumed before andduring drinking

• The length of time it has taken the drinker toconsume the alcohol.

According to the American Medical Association, a 180 lb(82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce (355 ml)bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BACof about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the

same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glassesof wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces(45 ml) of liquors like whiskey, gin or vodka.

It’s the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, ifthe same person drank three double martinis (3 ouncesor 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’sBAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A personwho consumes food just before or during drinking willhave a somewhat lower BAC level.

4-3

There is a gender difference, too. Women generallyhave a lower relative percentage of body waterthan men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, thismeans that a woman generally will reach a higher BAClevel than a man of her same body weight will wheneach has the same number of drinks.

The law in an increasing number of U.S. states, andthroughout Canada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent.In some other countries, the limit is even lower. Forexample, it is 0.05 percent in both France and Germany.The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the UnitedStates is 0.04 percent.

The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to sixdrinks (in one hour). Of course, as we’ve seen, itdepends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and howquickly the person drinks them.

But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skillsof many people are impaired at a BAC approaching0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. Alldrivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.Statistics show that the chance of being in a collisionincreases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of

0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having acollision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chanceof this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at alevel of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!

The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcoholin one drink. No amount of coffee or number of coldshowers will speed that up. “I’ll be careful” isn’t the rightanswer. What if there’s an emergency, a need totake sudden action, as when a child darts into thestreet? A person with even a moderate BAC might notbe able to react quickly enough to avoid the collision.

There’s something else about drinking and driving thatmany people don’t know. Medical research showsthat alcohol in a person’s system can make crashinjuries worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinalcord or heart. This means that when anyone whohas been drinking — driver or passenger — is in acrash, that person’s chance of being killed orpermanently disabled is higher than if the person hadnot been drinking.

4-4

{CAUTION:

Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.Your reflexes, perceptions, attentivenessand judgment can be affected by even asmall amount of alcohol. You can have aserious — or even fatal — collision if you driveafter drinking. Please don’t drink and drive orride with a driver who has been drinking. Ridehome in a cab; or if you’re with a group,designate a driver who will not drink.

Control of a VehicleYou have three systems that make your vehicle gowhere you want it to go. They are the brakes, thesteering and the accelerator. All three systems have to dotheir work at the places where the tires meet the road.

Sometimes, as when you’re driving on snow or ice, it’seasy to ask more of those control systems than thetires and road can provide. That means you can losecontrol of your vehicle. Also see Traction Control System(TCS) (3800 V6 Engine) on page 4-9.

4-5

BrakingBraking action involves perception time and reactiontime.

First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.That’s perception time. Then you have to bring up yourfoot and do it. That’s reaction time.

Average reaction time is about 3/4 of a second.But that’s only an average. It might be less with onedriver and as long as two or three seconds or morewith another. Age, physical condition, alertness,coordination and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,drugs and frustration. But even in 3/4 of a second, avehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet(20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an emergency,so keeping enough space between your vehicle andothers is important.

And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatlywith the surface of the road (whether it’s pavementor gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tiretread; the condition of your brakes; the weight ofthe vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.

Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive inspurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy braking— rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is amistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool betweenhard stops. Your brakes will wear out much faster ifyou do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace with the

traffic and allow realistic following distances, you willeliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That meansbetter braking and longer brake life.

If your engine ever stops while you’re driving, brakenormally but don’t pump your brakes. If you do,the pedal may get harder to push down. If your enginestops, you will still have some power brake assist.But you will use it when you brake. Once the powerassist is used up, it may take longer to stop andthe brake pedal will be harder to push.

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)Your vehicle may have anti-lock brakes. ABS is anadvanced electronic braking system that will helpprevent a braking skid.

If your vehicle has anti-lockbrakes, this warning lighton the instrument panel willcome on briefly whenyou start your vehicle.

When you start your engine, or when you begin to driveaway, your anti-lock brake system will check itself.You may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise whilethis test is going on, and you may even notice thatyour brake pedal moves or pulses a little. This is normal.

4-6

Let’s say the road is wet and you’re driving safely.Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slamon the brakes and continue braking. Here’s whathappens with ABS:

A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. Ifone of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computerwill separately work the brakes at each front wheeland at both rear wheels.

The anti-lock system can change the brake pressurefaster than any driver could. The computer isprogrammed to make the most of available tire and roadconditions. This can help you steer around the obstaclewhile braking hard.

As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updateson wheel speed and controls braking pressureaccordingly.

4-7

Remember: Anti-lock doesn’t change the time you needto get your foot up to the brake pedal or alwaysdecrease stopping distance. If you get too close to thevehicle in front of you, you won’t have time to applyyour brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, eventhough you have anti-lock brakes.

Using Anti-LockDon’t pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal downfirmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel aslight brake pedal pulsation or notice some noise, butthis is normal.

Braking in EmergenciesAt some time, nearly every driver gets into a situationthat requires hard braking.

If you have anti-lock, you can steer and brake at thesame time. However, if you don’t have anti-lock,your first reaction — to hit the brake pedal hard andhold it down — may be the wrong thing to do. Yourwheels can stop rolling. Once they do, the vehicle can’trespond to your steering. Momentum will carry it inwhatever direction it was headed when the wheelsstopped rolling. That could be off the road, into thevery thing you were trying to avoid, or into traffic.

If you don’t have anti-lock, use a “squeeze” brakingtechnique. This will give you maximum braking whilemaintaining steering control. You can do this by pushingon the brake pedal with steadily increasing pressure.

In an emergency, you will probably want to squeeze thebrakes hard without locking the wheels. If you hear orfeel the wheels sliding, ease off the brake pedal.This will help you retain steering control. If you do haveanti-lock, it’s different. See “Anti-Lock Brake System”in this section.

In many emergencies, steering can help you more thaneven the very best braking.

4-8

Traction Control System (TCS)(3800 V6 Engine)Your vehicle may have a traction control system thatlimits wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery roadconditions. The system operates only if it senses that oneor both of the front wheels are spinning or beginning tolose traction. When this happens, the system reducesengine power and may also upshift the transaxle andapply the front brakes to limit wheel spin.

This light will come on when your traction controlsystem is limiting wheel spin. See Traction ActiveMessage on page 3-41.

You may feel or hear the system working, but this isnormal.

If your vehicle is in cruise control when the tractioncontrol system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruisecontrol will automatically disengage. When road

conditions allow you to safely use it again, you mayre-engage the cruise control. See “Cruise Control”in Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7.

The traction control system operates in all transaxleshift lever positions. But the system can upshiftthe transaxle only as high as the shift lever positionyou’ve chosen, so you should use the lower gears onlywhen necessary. See Automatic Transaxle Operationon page 2-23.

When the system is on,this warning light will comeon to let you know ifthere’s a problem.

See. When this warning light is on, the system will notlimit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.

To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery road conditions,you should always leave the traction control system on.But you can turn the system off if you ever need to. Youshould turn the system off if your vehicle ever gets stuckin sand, mud or snow and rocking the vehicle is required.See “Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out” under If YouAre Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on page 4-30.


4-9

To turn the system on oroff, press the TRAC OFFbutton on the left sideof the instrument panel.

When you turn the system off, a chime will sound andthe TRAC OFF warning light will come on and stay on.If the traction control system is limiting wheel spinwhen you press the button to turn the system off, thewarning light will come on and the system will turnoff right away.

You can turn the system back on at any time bypressing the button again. The TRAC OFF warning lightshould go off.

Steering

Power SteeringIf you lose power steering assist because the enginestops or the system is not functioning, you can steer butit will take much more effort.

Steering TipsDriving on CurvesIt’s important to take curves at a reasonable speed.

A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned onthe news happen on curves.

Here’s why:

Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject tothe same laws of physics when driving on curves.The traction of the tires against the road surface makesit possible for the vehicle to change its path whenyou turn the front wheels. If there’s no traction, inertiawill keep the vehicle going in the same direction. Ifyou’ve ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you’llunderstand this.

The traction you can get in a curve depends on thecondition of your tires and the road surface, the angleat which the curve is banked, and your speed. Whileyou’re in a curve, speed is the one factor youcan control.

4-10

Suppose you’re steering through a sharp curve.Then you suddenly apply the brakes. Both controlsystems — steering and braking — have to do theirwork where the tires meet the road. Unless youhave four-wheel anti-lock brakes, adding the hardbraking can demand too much of those places. Youcan lose control.

The same thing can happen if you’re steering througha sharp curve and you suddenly accelerate. Thosetwo control systems — steering and acceleration — canoverwhelm those places where the tires meet theroad and make you lose control.

What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up onthe brake or accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the wayyou want it to go, and slow down.

Speed limit signs near curves warn that you shouldadjust your speed. Of course, the posted speedsare based on good weather and road conditions. Underless favorable conditions you’ll want to go slower.

If you need to reduce your speed as you approach acurve, do it before you enter the curve, while your frontwheels are straight ahead.

Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through thecurve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait toaccelerate until you are out of the curve, and thenaccelerate gently into the straightaway.

Steering in EmergenciesThere are times when steering can be more effectivethan braking. For example, you come over a hill and finda truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pullsout from nowhere, or a child darts out from betweenparked cars and stops right in front of you. Youcan avoid these problems by braking — if you can stopin time. But sometimes you can’t; there isn’t room.That’s the time for evasive action — steering aroundthe problem.

Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies likethese. First apply your brakes — but, unless youhave anti-lock, not enough to lock your wheels.

See Braking on page 4-6. It is better to remove as muchspeed as you can from a possible collision. Thensteer around the problem, to the left or right dependingon the space available.

4-11

An emergency like this requires close attention and aquick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel atthe recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, youcan turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly withoutremoving either hand. But you have to act fast, steerquickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheelonce you have avoided the object.

The fact that such emergency situations are alwayspossible is a good reason to practice defensive drivingat all times and wear safety belts properly.

Off-Road RecoveryYou may find that your right wheels have dropped offthe edge of a road onto the shoulder while you’redriving.

If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below thepavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off theaccelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge ofthe pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up toone-quarter turn until the right front tire contactsthe pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel to gostraight down the roadway.

4-12

PassingThe driver of a vehicle about to pass another on atwo-lane highway waits for just the right moment,accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, thengoes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?

Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lanehighway is a potentially dangerous move, since thepassing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncomingtraffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error injudgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or angercan suddenly put the passing driver face to face with theworst of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.

So here are some tips for passing:

• “Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sidesand to crossroads for situations that might affectyour passing patterns. If you have any doubtwhatsoever about making a successful pass, waitfor a better time.

• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings andlines. If you can see a sign up ahead that mightindicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass.A broken center line usually indicates it’s allright to pass (providing the road ahead is clear).Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane ora double solid line, even if the road seems emptyof approaching traffic.

• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want topass while you’re awaiting an opportunity. Forone thing, following too closely reduces your areaof vision, especially if you’re following a largervehicle. Also, you won’t have adequate space if thevehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops. Keepback a reasonable distance.

• When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,start to accelerate but stay in the right lane anddon’t get too close. Time your move so you willbe increasing speed as the time comes to moveinto the other lane. If the way is clear to pass,you will have a “running start” that more than makesup for the distance you would lose by droppingback. And if something happens to cause you tocancel your pass, you need only slow downand drop back again and wait for anotheropportunity.

• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle,wait your turn. But take care that someone isn’ttrying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slowvehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulderand check the blind spot.

4-13

• Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, andstart your left lane change signal before moving outof the right lane to pass. When you are farenough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its frontin your inside mirror, activate your right lanechange signal and move back into the right lane.(Remember that your right outside mirror is convex.The vehicle you just passed may seem to befarther away from you than it really is.)

• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time ontwo-lane roads. Reconsider before passing thenext vehicle.

• Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, itmay be slowing down or starting to turn.

• If you’re being passed, make it easy for thefollowing driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps youcan ease a little to the right.

Loss of ControlLet’s review what driving experts say about whathappens when the three control systems (brakes,steering and acceleration) don’t have enough frictionwhere the tires meet the road to do what the driver hasasked.

In any emergency, don’t give up. Keep trying to steerand constantly seek an escape route or area ofless danger.

4-14

SkiddingIn a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonablecare suited to existing conditions, and by not“overdriving” those conditions. But skids are alwayspossible.

The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’sthree control systems. In the braking skid, your wheelsaren’t rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, toomuch speed or steering in a curve causes tires toslip and lose cornering force. And in the accelerationskid, too much throttle causes the driving wheelsto spin.

A cornering skid and an acceleration skid are besthandled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.

If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off theaccelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you wantthe vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,your vehicle may straighten out. Always be readyfor a second skid if it occurs.

Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,gravel or other material is on the road. For safety, you’llwant to slow down and adjust your driving to theseconditions. It is important to slow down on slipperysurfaces because stopping distance will be longer andvehicle control more limited.

While driving on a surface with reduced traction, tryyour best to avoid sudden steering, accelerationor braking (including engine braking by shifting to alower gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tiresto slide. You may not realize the surface is slipperyuntil your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warningclues — such as enough water, ice or packed snowon the road to make a “mirrored surface” — and slowdown when you have any doubt.

If you have the anti-lock braking system, remember: Ithelps avoid only the braking skid. If you do not haveanti-lock, then in a braking skid (where the wheels areno longer rolling), release enough pressure on thebrakes to get the wheels rolling again. This restoressteering control. Push the brake pedal down steadilywhen you have to stop suddenly. As long as the wheelsare rolling, you will have steering control.

4-15

Driving at Night

Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.One reason is that some drivers are likely to beimpaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night visionproblems, or by fatigue.

Here are some tips on night driving.

• Drive defensively.

• Don’t drink and drive.

• Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce theglare from headlamps behind you.

• Since you can’t see as well, you may need to slowdown and keep more space between you andother vehicles.

• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Yourheadlamps can light up only so much road ahead.

• In remote areas, watch for animals.

• If you’re tired, pull off the road in a safe placeand rest.

No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. Butas we get older these differences increase. A50-year-old driver may require at least twice as muchlight to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.

What you do in the daytime can also affect yournight vision. For example, if you spend the day in brightsunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Youreyes will have less trouble adjusting to night.

4-16

But if you’re driving, don’t wear sunglasses at night.They may cut down on glare from headlamps, but theyalso make a lot of things invisible.

You can be temporarily blinded by approachingheadlamps. It can take a second or two, or even severalseconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark. Whenyou are faced with severe glare (as from a driverwho doesn’t lower the high beams, or a vehicle withmisaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid staringdirectly into the approaching headlamps.

Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicleclean — inside and out. Glare at night is made muchworse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glasscan build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makeslights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.

Remember that your headlamps light up far less of aroadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keepyour eyes moving; that way, it’s easier to pick out dimlylighted objects. Just as your headlamps should bechecked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyesbe examined regularly. Some drivers suffer fromnight blindness — the inability to see in dim light — andaren’t even aware of it.

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads

Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wetroad, you can’t stop, accelerate or turn as wellbecause your tire-to-road traction isn’t as good as ondry roads. And, if your tires don’t have much tread left,you’ll get even less traction. It’s always wise to goslower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while you aredriving. The surface may get wet suddenly when yourreflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.

4-17

The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if yourwindshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavyrain can make it harder to see road signs andtraffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the roadand even people walking.

It’s wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment ingood shape and keep your windshield washer tank filledwith washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiperinserts when they show signs of streaking or missingareas on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start toseparate from the inserts.

Driving too fast through large water puddles or evengoing through some car washes can cause problems,too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoidpuddles. But if you can’t, try to slow down before youhit them.

{CAUTION:

Wet brakes can cause accidents. They won’twork as well in a quick stop and may causepulling to one side. You could lose control ofthe vehicle.

After driving through a large puddle of wateror a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightlyuntil your brakes work normally.

4-18

HydroplaningHydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build upunder your tires that they can actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the road is wet enough andyou’re going fast enough. When your vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.

Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But it can ifyour tires do not have much tread or if the pressure inone or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water isstanding on the road. If you can see reflectionsfrom trees, telephone poles or other vehicles, andraindrops “dimple” the water’s surface, there could behydroplaning.

Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. Therejust isn’t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.

Driving Through Deep Standing Water

Notice: If you drive too quickly through deeppuddles or standing water, water can come inthrough your engine’s air intake and badly damageyour engine. Never drive through water that isslightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle. Ifyou can’t avoid deep puddles or standing water,drive through them very slowly.

Driving Through Flowing Water

{CAUTION:

Flowing or rushing water creates strongforces. If you try to drive through flowingwater, as you might at a low water crossing,your vehicle can be carried away. As little assix inches of flowing water can carry away asmaller vehicle. If this happens, you and othervehicle occupants could drown. Don’t ignorepolice warning signs, and otherwise be verycautious about trying to drive throughflowing water.

Some Other Rainy Weather Tips• Besides slowing down, allow some extra following

distance. And be especially careful when you passanother vehicle. Allow yourself more clear roomahead, and be prepared to have your view restrictedby road spray.

• Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tireson page 5-61.

4-19

City Driving One of the biggest problems with city streets is theamount of traffic on them. You’ll want to watch out forwhat the other drivers are doing and pay attentionto traffic signals.

Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:

• Know the best way to get to where you aregoing. Get a city map and plan your trip intoan unknown part of the city just as you would for across-country trip.

• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscrossmost large cities. You’ll save time and energy.See the next part, “Freeway Driving.”

• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A trafficlight is there because the corner is busy enoughto need it. When a light turns green, and just beforeyou start to move, check both ways for vehiclesthat have not cleared the intersection or maybe running the red light.

4-20

Freeway Driving

Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways,expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are thesafest of all roads. But they have their own special rules.

The most important advice on freeway driving is:Keep up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at thesame speed most of the other drivers are driving.Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow.Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.

At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads tothe freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway asyou drive along the entrance ramp, you should beginto check traffic. Try to determine where you expectto blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at closeto the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal,check your mirrors and glance over your shoulder asoften as necessary. Try to blend smoothly with thetraffic flow.

Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to theposted limit or to the prevailing rate if it’s slower.Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.

Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then useyour turn signal.

Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over yourshoulder to make sure there isn’t another vehicle inyour “blind” spot.

Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain youallow a reasonable following distance.

Expect to move slightly slower at night.

When you want to leave the freeway, move to theproper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, donot, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Driveon to the next exit.

4-21

The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.The exit speed is usually posted. Reduce your speedaccording to your speedometer, not to your senseof motion. After driving for any distance at higherspeeds, you may tend to think you are going slowerthan you actually are.

Before Leaving on a Long TripMake sure you’re ready. Try to be well rested. If youmust start when you’re not fresh — such as after a day’swork — don’t plan to make too many miles that firstpart of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing and shoesyou can easily drive in.

Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep itserviced and maintained, it’s ready to go. If it needsservice, have it done before starting out. Of course,you’ll find experienced and able service experts in GMdealerships all across North America. They’ll beready and willing to help if you need it.

Here are some things you can check before a trip:

• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full? Areall windows clean inside and outside?

• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?

• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checkedall levels?

• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?

• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough forlong-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to therecommended pressure?

• Weather Forecasts: What’s the weather outlookalong your route? Should you delay your trip ashort time to avoid a major storm system?

• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?

4-22

Highway HypnosisIs there actually such a condition as “highwayhypnosis”? Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel?Call it highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, orwhatever.

There is something about an easy stretch of road withthe same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on theroad, the drone of the engine, and the rush of thewind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Don’tlet it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can leavethe road in less than a second, and you could crash andbe injured.

What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, beaware that it can happen.

Then here are some tips:

• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with acomfortably cool interior.

• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead andto the sides. Check your rearview mirrors and yourinstruments frequently.

• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,service or parking area and take a nap, get someexercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsinesson the highway as an emergency.

Hill and Mountain Roads

Driving on steep hills or mountains is different fromdriving in flat or rolling terrain.

4-23

If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you’replanning to visit there, here are some tips that can makeyour trips safer and more enjoyable.

• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluidlevels and also the brakes, tires, cooling systemand transaxle. These parts can work hard onmountain roads.

• Know how to go down hills. The most importantthing to know is this: let your engine do some ofthe slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you godown a steep or long hill.

{CAUTION:

If you don’t shift down, your brakes could getso hot that they wouldn’t work well. You wouldthen have poor braking or even none goingdown a hill. You could crash. Shift down to letyour engine assist your brakes on a steepdownhill slope.

{CAUTION:

Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with theignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will haveto do all the work of slowing down. They couldget so hot that they wouldn’t work well. Youwould then have poor braking or even nonegoing down a hill. You could crash. Alwayshave your engine running and your vehicle ingear when you go downhill.

4-24

• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift downto a lower gear. The lower gears help cool yourengine and transaxle, and you can climb thehill better.

• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-laneroads in hills or mountains. Don’t swing wide orcut across the center of the road. Drive at speedsthat let you stay in your own lane.

• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. Therecould be something in your lane, like a stalled car oran accident.

• You may see highway signs on mountains thatwarn of special problems. Examples are longgrades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocksarea or winding roads. Be alert to these and takeappropriate action.

Winter Driving

Here are some tips for winter driving:

• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.

• You may want to put winter emergency supplies inyour trunk.

4-25

Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, asupply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winterouter clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a redcloth and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And, ifyou will be driving under severe conditions, include asmall bag of sand, a piece of old carpet or a couple ofburlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure youproperly secure these items in your vehicle.

Driving on Snow or IceMost of the time, those places where your tires meetthe road probably have good traction.

However, if there is snow or ice between your tires andthe road, you can have a very slippery situation.You’ll have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need tobe very careful.

4-26

What’s the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very coldsnow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wetice can be even more trouble because it may offerthe least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it’sabout freezing (32°F; 0°C) and freezing rain beginsto fall. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sandcrews can get there.

Whatever the condition – smooth ice, packed, blowingor loose snow – drive with caution.

Keep your traction control system on. It improves yourability to accelerate when driving on a slippery road.Even though your vehicle has a traction control system,you’ll want to slow down and adjust your driving tothe road conditions. See Traction Control System (TCS)(3800 V6 Engine) on page 4-9.

Unless you have the anti-lock braking system, you’llwant to brake very gently, too. (If you do have anti-lock,see Braking on page 4-6. This system improves yourvehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on aslippery road.) Whether you have the anti-lock brakingsystem or not, you’ll want to begin stopping sooner thanyou would on dry pavement. Without anti-lock brakes,if you feel your vehicle begin to slide, let up on thebrakes a little. Push the brake pedal down steadily toget the most traction you can.

Remember, unless you have anti-lock, if you brakeso hard that your wheels stop rolling, you’ll just slide.Brake so your wheels always keep rolling and you canstill steer.

• Whatever your braking system, allow greaterfollowing distance on any slippery road.

• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fineuntil you hit a spot that’s covered with ice. Onan otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear inshaded areas where the sun can’t reach: aroundclumps of trees, behind buildings or under bridges.Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpassmay remain icy when the surrounding roadsare clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead of you,brake before you are on it. Try not to brakewhile you’re actually on the ice, and avoid suddensteering maneuvers.

4-27

If You’re Caught in a Blizzard

If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in aserious situation. You should probably stay withyour vehicle unless you know for sure that you are nearhelp and you can hike through the snow. Here aresome things to do to summon help and keep yourselfand your passengers safe:

• Turn on your hazard flashers.

• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police thatyou’ve been stopped by the snow.

• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.If you have no blankets or extra clothing, makebody insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags,floor mats – anything you can wrap aroundyourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.

4-28

You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.

{CAUTION:

Snow can trap exhaust gases under yourvehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbonmonoxide) gas to get inside. CO couldovercome you and kill you. You can’t see it orsmell it, so you might not know it is in yourvehicle. Clear away snow from around thebase of your vehicle, especially any that isblocking your exhaust pipe. And check aroundagain from time to time to be sure snowdoesn’t collect there.

Open a window just a little on the side of thevehicle that’s away from the wind. This willhelp keep CO out.

Run your engine only as long as you must. This savesfuel. When you run the engine, make it go a littlefaster than just idle. That is, push the acceleratorslightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get andit keeps the battery charged. You will need awell-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possiblyfor signaling later on with your headlamps. Let theheater run for a while.

Then, shut the engine off and close the window almostall the way to preserve the heat. Start the engineagain and repeat this only when you feel reallyuncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little aspossible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To helpkeep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and dosome fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so untilhelp comes.

4-29

If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Iceor SnowIn order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you willneed to spin the wheels, but you don’t want to spin yourwheels too fast. The method known as “rocking” canhelp you get out when you’re stuck, but you mustuse caution.

{CAUTION:

If you let your tires spin at high speed, theycan explode, and you or others could beinjured. And, the transaxle or other parts of thevehicle can overheat. That could cause anengine compartment fire or other damage.When you’re stuck, spin the wheels as little aspossible. Don’t spin the wheels above 35 mph(55 km/h) as shown on the speedometer.

Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts ofyour vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin thewheels too fast while shifting your transaxle backand forth, you can destroy your transaxle. See“Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out.”

For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,see Tire Chains on page 5-71.

Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It OutFirst, turn your steering wheel left and right. That willclear the area around your front wheels. If your vehiclehas traction control, you should turn the system off.See Traction Control System (TCS) (3800 V6 Engine)on page 4-9. Then shift back and forth betweenREVERSE (R) and a forward gear, spinning the wheelsas little as possible. Release the accelerator pedalwhile you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedalwhen the transaxle is in gear. By slowly spinning yourwheels in the forward and reverse directions, youwill cause a rocking motion that may free your vehicle. Ifthat doesn’t get you out after a few tries, you mayneed to be towed out. If you do need to be towed out,see “Towing Your Vehicle” following.

4-30

Towing

Towing Your VehicleConsult your dealer or a professional towing service ifyou need to have your disabled vehicle towed. SeeRoadside Assistance Program on page 7-5.

If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehiclefor recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.

Recreational Vehicle TowingRecreational vehicle towing means towing your vehiclebehind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.The two most common types of recreational vehicletowing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing yourvehicle with all four wheels on the ground) and “dollytowing” (towing your vehicle with two wheels onthe ground and two wheels up on a device knownas a “dolly”).

With the proper preparation and equipment, manyvehicles can be towed in these ways. See “DinghyTowing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.

Here are some important things to consider before youdo recreational vehicle towing:

• What’s the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’srecommendations.

• How far will you tow? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and how long they can tow.

• Do you have the proper towing equipment?See your dealer or trailering professional foradditional advice and equipment recommendations.

• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as youwould prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you’llwant to make sure your vehicle is prepared to betowed. See Before Leaving on a Long Trip onpage 4-22.

Dinghy Towing

Notice: Towing your vehicle with all four wheels onthe ground will damage drivetrain components.

Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with all fourwheels on the ground. If your vehicle must be towed,you should use a dolly. See “Dolly Towing” that followsfor more information.

4-31

Dolly Towing

Your vehicle can be towed using a dolly. To tow yourvehicle using a dolly, follow these steps:

1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.

2. Put the vehicle in PARK (P).

3. Set the parking brake and then remove the key.

4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-aheadposition.

5. Releases the parking brake.

Loading Your Vehicle

Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight itmay properly carry. The Tire-Loading Information label ison the inside of the trunk lid. The label tells you theproper size, speed rating and recommended inflationpressures for the tires on your vehicle. It also gives youimportant information about the number of peoplethat can be in your vehicle and the total weight you cancarry. This weight is called the vehicle capacityweight and includes the weight of all occupants, cargoand all nonfactory-installed options.

4-32

The other label is the Certification label, found on therear edge of the driver’s door. It tells you the grossweight capacity of your vehicle, called the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes theweight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo.Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the front orrear axle.

If you do have a heavy load, spread it out. Don’t carrymore than 167 pounds (75 kg) in your trunk.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier than theGVWR, or either the maximum front or rearGAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle canbreak, and it can change the way your vehiclehandles. These could cause you to losecontrol and crash. Also, overloading canshorten the life of your vehicle.

Notice: Your warranty does not cover parts orcomponents that fail because of overloading.

4-33

If you put things inside your vehicle — like suitcases,tools, packages or anything else — they will go as fastas the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turnquickly, or if there is a crash, they’ll keep going.

{CAUTION:

Things you put inside your vehicle can strikeand injure people in a sudden stop or turn, orin a crash.

• Put things in the trunk of your vehicle. In atrunk, put them as far forward as you can.Try to spread the weight evenly.

• Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so that some of themare above the tops of the seats.

• Don’t leave an unsecured child restraint inyour vehicle.

• When you carry something inside thevehicle, secure it whenever you can.

• Don’t leave a seat folded down unless youneed to.

Towing a Trailer

{CAUTION:

If you don’t use the correct equipment anddrive properly, you can lose control when youpull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is tooheavy, the brakes may not work well — oreven at all. You and your passengers could beseriously injured. You may also damage yourvehicle; the resulting repairs would not becovered by your warranty. Pull a trailer only ifyou have followed all the steps in this section.Ask your dealer for advice and informationabout towing a trailer with your vehicle.

Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with theproper trailer towing equipment. To identify whatthe vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle, youshould read the information in”Weight of the Trailer” thatappears later in this section. But trailering is differentthan just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering meanschanges in handling, durability and fuel economy.Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment, andit has to be used properly.

4-34

That’s the reason for this part. In it are many time-tested,important trailering tips and safety rules. Many ofthese are important for your safety and that of yourpassengers. So please read this section carefully beforeyou pull a trailer.

Load-pulling components such as the engine, transaxle,wheel assemblies and tires are forced to work harderagainst the drag of the added weight. The engineis required to operate at relatively higher speeds andunder greater loads, generating extra heat. What’s more,the trailer adds considerably to wind resistance,increasing the pulling requirements.

If You Do Decide To Pull A TrailerIf you do, here are some important points:

• There are many different laws, including speed limitrestrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sureyour rig will be legal, not only where you livebut also where you’ll be driving. A good source forthis information can be state or provincial police.

• Consider using a sway control. You can ask a hitchdealer about sway controls.

• Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 1,000 miles(1 600 km) your new vehicle is driven. Yourengine, axle or other parts could be damaged.

• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that youtow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)and don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps yourengine and other parts of your vehicle wear in atthe heavier loads.

• Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.Don’t drive faster than the maximum posted speedfor trailers, or no more than 55 mph (90 km/h),to save wear on your vehicle’s parts.

Three important considerations have to do with weight:

• the weight of the trailer,

• the weight of the trailer tongue

• and the total weight on your vehicle’s tires.

4-35

Weight of the TrailerHow heavy can a trailer safely be?

It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg). Buteven that can be too heavy.

It depends on how you plan to use your rig. Forexample, speed, altitude, road grades, outsidetemperature and how much your vehicle is used to pulla trailer are all important. And, it can also dependon any special equipment that you have on your vehicle.

You can ask your dealer for our trailering informationor advice, or you can write us at:

Chevrolet Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170

In Canada, write to:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, 163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Weight of the Trailer TongueThe tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weightto measure because it affects the total or gross weightof your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo youmay carry in it, and the people who will be riding in

the vehicle. And if you tow a trailer, you must add thetongue load to the GVW because your vehicle willbe carrying that weight, too. See Loading Your Vehicleon page 4-32 for more information about yourvehicle’s maximum load capacity.

If you’re using a weight-carrying hitch or aweight-distributing hitch, the trailer tongue (A) shouldweigh 10 to 15 percent of the total loaded trailerweight (B).

After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer andthen the tongue, separately, to see if the weightsare proper. If they aren’t, you may be able to getthem right simply by moving some items around inthe trailer.

4-36

Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s TiresBe sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upperlimit for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers onthe Tire-Loading Information label, located on theinside of the trunk lid, or see Loading Your Vehicle onpage 4-32. Then be sure you don’t go over theGVW limit for your vehicle, including the weight ofthe trailer tongue.

HitchesIt’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads area few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch. Hereare some rules to follow:

• The rear bumper on your vehicle is not intended forhitches. Do not attach rental hitches or otherbumper-type hitches to it. Use only a frame-mountedhitch that does not attach to the bumper.

• Will you have to make any holes in the body of yourvehicle when you install a trailer hitch? If you do, thenbe sure to seal the holes later when you remove thehitch. If you don’t seal them, deadly carbon monoxide(CO) from your exhaust can get into your vehicle.See Engine Exhaust on page 2-31 in the Index. Dirtand water can, too.

Safety ChainsYou should always attach chains between your vehicleand your trailer. Cross the safety chains under thetongue of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop tothe road if it becomes separated from the hitch.Instructions about safety chains may be provided by thehitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer.Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation for attachingsafety chains and do not attach them to the bumper.Always leave just enough slack so you can turnwith your rig. And, never allow safety chains to drag onthe ground.

Trailer BrakesDoes your trailer have its own brakes? Be sure to readand follow the instructions for the trailer brakes soyou’ll be able to install, adjust and maintain themproperly.

• If your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, do not try to tapinto your vehicle’s brake system. If you do, bothbrake systems won’t work well, or at all.

• Even if your vehicle doesn’t have anti-lock brakes,don’t tap into your vehicle’s brake system if thetrailer’s brake system will use more than 0.02 cubicinch (0.3 cc) of fluid from your vehicle’s mastercylinder. If it does, both braking systems won’t workwell. You could even lose your brakes.

4-37

• Will the trailer brake parts take 3,000 psi (20650 kPa) of pressure? If not, the trailer brakesystem must not be used with your vehicle.

• If everything checks out this far, then make thebrake fluid tap at the upper rear master cylinderport. But don’t use copper tubing for this. If you do,it will bend and break off. Use steel brake tubing.

Driving with a TrailerTowing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to getto know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel ofhandling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.And always keep in mind that the vehicle you aredriving is now a good deal longer and not nearly asresponsive as your vehicle is by itself.

Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform(and attachments), safety chains, electrical connector,lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer haselectric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving andthen apply the trailer brake controller by hand to besure the brakes are working. This lets you check yourelectrical connection at the same time.

During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that theload is secure, and that the lamps and any trailerbrakes are still working.

Following DistanceStay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead asyou would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.This can help you avoid situations that requireheavy braking and sudden turns.

PassingYou’ll need more passing distance up ahead whenyou’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deallonger, you’ll need to go much farther beyond thepassed vehicle before you can return to your lane.

Backing UpHold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that handto the left. To move the trailer to the right, move yourhand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,have someone guide you.

Making TurnsNotice: Making very sharp turns while traileringcould cause the trailer to come in contact with thevehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoidmaking very sharp turns while trailering.

When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turnsthan normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike softshoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects. Avoidjerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance.

4-38

Turn Signals When Towing a TrailerWhen you tow a trailer, your vehicle may need additionalwiring. Check with your dealer. The arrows on yourinstrument panel will flash whenever you signal a turn orlane change. Properly hooked up, the trailer lampswill also flash, telling other drivers you’re about to turn,change lanes or stop.

When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrumentpanel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailerare burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behindyou are seeing your signal when they are not. It’simportant to check occasionally to be sure the trailerbulbs are still working.

Driving On GradesReduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you startdown a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shiftdown, you might have to use your brakes so much thatthey would get hot and no longer work well.

On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce yourspeed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce thepossibility of engine and transaxle overheating.

If you have overdrive, you may want to drive inTHIRD (3) instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVEX.

Parking on Hills

{CAUTION:

You really should not park your vehicle, with atrailer attached, on a hill. If something goeswrong, your rig could start to move. Peoplecan be injured, and both your vehicle and thetrailer can be damaged.

But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’show to do it:

1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift intoPARK (P) yet.

2. Have someone place chocks under the trailerwheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release theregular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.

4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply yourparking brake, and then shift to PARK (P).

5. Release the regular brakes.

4-39

When You Are Ready to Leave AfterParking on a Hill

1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal downwhile you:

• start your engine,

• shift into a gear, and

• release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick up and storethe chocks.

Maintenance When Trailer TowingYour vehicle will need service more often when you’repulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for moreon this. Things that are especially important in traileroperation are automatic transaxle fluid (don’t overfill),engine oil, drive belts, cooling system and brake system.Each of these is covered in this manual, and theIndex will help you find them quickly. If you’re trailering,it’s a good idea to review this information before youstart your trip.

Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and boltsare tight.

Engine Cooling When Trailer TowingYour cooling system may temporarily overheat duringsevere operating conditions. See Engine Overheating onpage 5-30.

4-40

Service ............................................................5-3Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-4Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your

Vehicle ......................................................5-4

Fuel ................................................................5-5Gasoline Octane ............................................5-5Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-5California Fuel ...............................................5-6Additives .......................................................5-6Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................5-6Filling Your Tank ............................................5-7Filling a Portable Fuel Container .......................5-9

Checking Things Under the Hood ....................5-10Hood Release ..............................................5-10Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-12Engine Oil ...................................................5-16Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-22Automatic Transaxle Fluid ..............................5-24Engine Coolant .............................................5-27Radiator Pressure Cap ..................................5-30Engine Overheating .......................................5-30Cooling System ............................................5-33Power Steering Fluid .....................................5-43Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-44Brakes ........................................................5-45

Battery ........................................................5-48Jump Starting ...............................................5-49

Headlamp Aiming ...........................................5-55Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-56

Halogen Bulbs ..............................................5-56Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, and Parking

Lamps .....................................................5-56Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and

Sidemarker Lamps .....................................5-58Back-Up Lamps ............................................5-59Replacement Bulbs .......................................5-59

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-60Tires ..............................................................5-61

Inflation -- Tire Pressure ................................5-62Tire Pressure Monitor System .........................5-63Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................5-65When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-66Buying New Tires .........................................5-67Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-68Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-69Wheel Replacement ......................................5-69Tire Chains ..................................................5-71If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-71Changing a Flat Tire .....................................5-72Compact Spare Tire ......................................5-84

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

5-1

Appearance Care ............................................5-85Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .................5-85Care of Safety Belts ......................................5-88Weatherstrips ...............................................5-88Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle ..............5-88Sheet Metal Damage .....................................5-90Finish Damage .............................................5-90Underbody Maintenance ................................5-91Chemical Paint Spotting .................................5-91Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ..................5-91

Vehicle Identification ......................................5-93Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .................5-93Service Parts Identification Label .....................5-93

Electrical System ............................................5-94Add-On Electrical Equipment ..........................5-94Headlamp Wiring ..........................................5-94Windshield Wiper Fuses ................................5-94Power Windows and Other Power Options .......5-95Fuses and Circuit Breakers ............................5-95

Capacities and Specifications ........................5-103Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts .........5-105

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

5-2

ServiceYour dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you tobe happy with it. We hope you’ll go to your dealerfor all your service needs. You’ll get genuine GM partsand GM-trained and supported service people.

We hope you’ll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:

5-3

Doing Your Own Service WorkIf you want to do some of your own service work, you’llwant to use the proper service manual. It tells youmuch more about how to service your vehicle than thismanual can. To order the proper service manual,see Service Publications Ordering Information onpage 7-11.

Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attemptingto do your own service work, see Servicing Your AirBag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-60.

You should keep a record with all parts receipts and listthe mileage and the date of any service work youperform. See Part E: Maintenance Record on page 6-17.

{CAUTION:

You can be injured and your vehicle could bedamaged if you try to do service work on avehicle without knowing enough about it.

• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,experience, the proper replacement partsand tools before you attempt any vehiclemaintenance task.

• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts andother fasteners. “English” and “metric”fasteners can be easily confused. If youuse the wrong fasteners, parts can laterbreak or fall off. You could be hurt.

Adding Equipment to the Outside ofYour VehicleThings you might add to the outside of your vehicle canaffect the airflow around it. This may cause windnoise and affect windshield washer performance. Checkwith your dealer before adding equipment to theoutside of your vehicle.

5-4

FuelUse of the recommended fuel is an important part of theproper maintenance of your vehicle.

Gasoline OctaneUse regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octaneof 87 or higher. If the octane is less than 87, you mayget a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If thisoccurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher assoon as possible. Otherwise, you might damageyour engine. A little pinging noise when you accelerateor drive uphill is considered normal. This does notindicate a problem exists or that a higher-octane fuel isnecessary. If you are using 87 octane or higher-octanefuel and hear heavy knocking, your engine needs service.

Gasoline SpecificationsIt is recommended that gasoline meet specificationswhich were developed by the American AutomobileManufacturers Association and endorsed by theCanadian Vehicle Manufacturers Association for bettervehicle performance and engine protection. Gasolinemeeting these specifications could provide improveddriveability and emission control system performancecompared to other gasoline.

In Canada, look for the“Auto Makers’ Choice”label on the pump.

Canada Only

5-5

California FuelIf your vehicle is certified to meet California EmissionStandards (see the underhood emission control label), itis designed to operate on fuels that meet Californiaspecifications. If this fuel is not available in statesadopting California emissions standards, your vehiclewill operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federalspecifications, but emission control system performancemay be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp mayturn on (see Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-37 )and your vehicle may fail a smog-check test. If thisoccurs, return to your authorized GM dealer fordiagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is causedby the type of fuel used, repairs may not be coveredby your warranty.

AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United Statesare now required to contain additives that will helpprevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming,allowing your emission control system to workproperly. You should not have to add anything to yourfuel. Gasolines containing oxygenates, such asethers and ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may beavailable in your area to contribute to clean air.General Motors recommends that you use thesegasolines, particularly if they comply with thespecifications described earlier.

Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel thatcontains methanol. Don’t use fuel containingmethanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuelsystem and also damage the plastic and rubberparts. That damage wouldn’t be covered under yourwarranty.

Some gasolines that are not reformulated for lowemissions may contain an octane-enhancing additivecalled methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasolinewhether the fuel contains MMT. General Motors doesnot recommend the use of such gasolines. Fuelscontaining MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs andthe performance of the emission control system maybe affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may turnon. If this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealerfor service.

Fuels in Foreign CountriesIf you plan on driving in another country outside theUnited States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hardto find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuelnot recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costlyrepairs caused by use of improper fuel wouldn’t becovered by your warranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, orcontact a major oil company that does business in thecountry where you’ll be driving.

5-6

Filling Your Tank

{CAUTION:

Fuel vapor is highly flammable. It burnsviolently, and that can cause very bad injuries.Don’t smoke if you’re near fuel or refuelingyour vehicle. Keep sparks, flames and smokingmaterials away from fuel.

Turn your vehicle off to refuel.

The fuel cap is located behind a hinged door on thedriver’s side of the vehicle.

5-7

While refueling, let the fuel cap hang by the tetherbelow the fuel fill opening.

To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly to the left(counterclockwise).

{CAUTION:

If you get fuel on yourself and then somethingignites it, you could be badly burned. Fuel canspray out on you if you open the fuel cap tooquickly. This spray can happen if your tank isnearly full, and is more likely in hot weather.Open the fuel cap slowly and wait for any“hiss” noise to stop. Then unscrew the cap allthe way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Clean fuel from paintedsurfaces as soon as possible. See Cleaning the Outsideof Your Vehicle on page 5-88. When filling the tankdo not overfill by squeezing in much more fuel after thepump shuts off.

When you put the fuel cap back on, turn it to the right(clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. Makesure you fully install the cap. The diagnostic system candetermine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperlyinstalled. This would allow fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 3-37.

5-8

Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to getthe right type. Your dealer can get one for you.If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly.This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp tolight and may damage your fuel tank and emissionssystem. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in theIndex.

Filling a Portable Fuel Container

{CAUTION:

Never fill a portable fuel container while it is inyour vehicle. Static electricity discharge fromthe container can ignite the gasoline vapor.You can be badly burned and your vehicledamaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury toyou and others:

• Dispense gasoline only into approvedcontainers.

• Do not fill a container while it is inside avehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed oron any surface other than the ground.

• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with theinside of the fill opening before operatingthe nozzle. Contact should be maintaineduntil the filling is complete.

• Don’t smoke while pumping gasoline.

5-9

Checking Things Under theHood

{CAUTION:

An electric fan under the hood can start upand injure you even when the engine is notrunning. Keep hands, clothing and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:

Things that burn can get on hot engine partsand start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer andother fluids, and plastic or rubber. You orothers could be burned. Be careful not to dropor spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.

Hood ReleaseTo open the hood, do the following:

1. Pull the handle locatedinside the vehicle nearthe parking brakepedal.

5-10

2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and release thesecondary hood latch, located near the center ofthe hood front, by pushing the latch to the right.

3. Lift the hood.

Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps areon properly. Then pull the hood down and close it firmly.

5-11

Engine Compartment OverviewWhen you open the hood on the 3400 V6 (Code E) engine, you’ll see the following:

5-12

A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 5-44.

B. Battery. See Battery on page 5-48.C. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting on

page 5-49.D. Upper Underhood Fuse Block. See “Upperhood

Fuse Block (Upper)” under Fuses and CircuitBreakers on page 5-95.

E. Lower Underhood Fuse Block. See “UnderhoodFuse Block (Lower)” under Fuses and CircuitBreakers on page 5-95.

F. Radiator Pressure Cap. See Radiator Pressure Capon page 5-30.

G. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank. See Cooling Systemon page 5-33.

H. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power SteeringFluid on page 5-43.

I. Electric Cooling Fan. See Cooling System onpage 5-33.

J. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “Checking Engine Oil”under Engine Oil on page 5-16.

K. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”under Engine Oil on page 5-16.

L. Bleed Valves (underneath engine shield). See “Howto Add Coolant to the Radiator” under CoolingSystem on page 5-33.

M. Transaxle Fluid Dipstick. See Automatic TransaxleFluid on page 5-24.

N. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See Brakes onpage 5-45.

O. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 5-22.

5-13

When you open the hood on the 3800 V6 (Code K) engine, you’ll see the following:

5-14

A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 5-44.

B. Battery. See Battery on page 5-48.C. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting on

page 5-49.D. Upper Underhood Fuse Block. See “Upperhood

Fuse Block (Upper)” under Fuses and CircuitBreakers on page 5-95.

E. Lower Underhood Fuse Block. See “UnderhoodFuse Block (Lower)” under Fuses and CircuitBreakers on page 5-95.

F. Radiator Pressure Cap. See Radiator Pressure Capon page 5-30.

G. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank. See Cooling Systemon page 5-33

H. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir (low in enginecompartment). See Power Steering Fluid onpage 5-43.

I. Electric Cooling Fan. See Cooling System onpage 5-33.

J. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”under Engine Oil on page 5-16.

K. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “Checking Engine Oil”under Engine Oil on page 5-16.

L. Bleed Valves (underneath engine shield). See “Howto Add Coolant to the Radiator” under CoolingSystem on page 5-33.

M. Transaxle Fluid Dipstick. See Automatic TransaxleFluid on page 5-24.

N. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See Brakes onpage 5-45.

O. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 5-22.

5-15

Engine Oil

Checking Engine OilIt’s a good idea to check your engine oil every time youget fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oilmust be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.

The engine oil dipstick handle is the yellow loop locatednear the front of the engine. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 5-12 for more information on location.

Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes todrain back into the oil pan. If you don’t, the oildipstick might not show the actual level.

Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel orcloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again,keeping the tip down, and check the level.

3400 (Code E) V6Engine

3800 (Code K) Engine

3400 (Code E) V6 Engine

3800 (Code K) V6 Engine

5-16

When to Add Engine OilIf the oil is at or below the cross-hatched area at the tipof the dipstick, then you’ll need to add at least onequart of oil. But you must use the right kind. This partexplains what kind of oil to use. For engine oil crankcasecapacity, see Capacities and Specifications onpage 5-103.

Notice: Don’t add too much oil. If your engine hasso much oil that the oil level gets above thecross-hatched area that shows the proper operatingrange, your engine could be damaged.

The engine oil fill cap is located toward the front of theengine near the yellow-looped engine oil dipstickhandle. See Engine Compartment Overview onpage 5-12 for more information on location.

Be sure to fill it enough to put the level somewhere inthe proper operating range in the cross-hatchedarea. Push the dipstick all the way back in whenyou’re through.


3800 (Code K) V6Engine

5-17

What Kind of Engine Oil to UseOils recommended for your vehicle can be identified bylooking for the starburst symbol.

This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified bythe American Petroleum Institute (API). Do not useany oil which does not carry this starburst symbol.

If you choose to performthe engine oil changeservice yourself, be surethe oil you use hasthe starburst symbol onthe front of the oilcontainer. If you have youroil changed for you, besure the oil put intoyour engine is AmericanPetroleum Institute certifiedfor gasoline engines.

You should also use the proper viscosity oil for yourvehicle, as shown in the viscosity chart.

3400 (Code E) V6 Engine

5-18

As in the chart shown previously, if you have the 3400V6 engine, SAE 5W-30 is the only viscosity graderecommended for your vehicle. You should look for anduse only oils which have the API Starburst symboland which are also identified as SAE 5W-30. Ifyou cannot find such SAE 5W-30 oils, you can use anSAE 10W-30 oil which has the API Starburst symbol,if it’s going to be 0°F (−18°C) or above. Do not use otherviscosity grade oils, such as SAE 10W-40 orSAE 20W-50 under any conditions.

As shown in the following chart, if you have the 3800V6 engine, SAE 10W-30 is the viscosity graderecommended for your vehicle. However, you can useSAE 5W-30 if it’s going to be colder than 60°F(16°C) before your next oil change. When it’s very cold,colder than 0°F (−18°C), you should use an SAE 5W-30oil. These numbers on an oil container show itsviscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscositygrade oils, such as SAE 10W-40 or SAE 20W-50 underany conditions.

3800 (Code K) V6 Engine

5-19

Notice: Use only engine oil with the AmericanPetroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Enginesstarburst symbol. Failure to use the recommendedoil can result in engine damage not covered byyour warranty.GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirements foryour vehicle.If you are in an area of extreme cold, where thetemperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it isrecommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provideeasier cold starting and better protection for your engineat extremely low temperatures.

Engine Oil AdditivesDon’t add anything to your oil. The recommended oilswith the starburst symbol are all you will need forgood performance and engine protection.

When to Change Engine Oil (GM OilLife System)Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you knowwhen to change the engine oil and filter. This isbased on engine revolutions and engine temperature,and not on mileage. Based on driving conditions,the mileage at which an oil change will be indicated canvary considerably. For the oil life system to work properly,you must reset the system every time the oil is changed.

When the system has calculated that oil life has beendiminished, it will indicate that an oil change isnecessary. A CHANGE ENGINE OIL message willcome on. Change your oil as soon as possible withinthe next two times you stop for fuel. It is possible that, ifyou are driving under the best conditions, the oil lifesystem may not indicate that an oil change is necessaryfor over a year. However, your engine oil and filtermust be changed at least once a year and at this timethe system must be reset. Your dealer has GM-trainedservice people who will perform this work usinggenuine GM parts and reset the system. It is alsoimportant to check your oil regularly and keep it at theproper level.

If the system is ever reset accidentally, you mustchange your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since yourlast oil change. Remember to reset the oil life systemwhenever the oil is changed.

5-20

How to Reset the Change Engine OilMessageThe GM Oil Life System calculates when to changeyour engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Anytimeyour oil is changed, reset the system so it cancalculate when the next oil change is required. If asituation occurs where you change your oil prior to aCHANGE ENGINE OIL message being turned on, resetthe system.

After changing the engine oil, the system must be reset.To reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message useone of the following procedures:

Using the Radio1. Turn the ignition to ACC or ON, with the radio off.

2. Press and hold the TUNE DISP button on the radiofor at least five seconds until SETTINGS isdisplayed.

3. Press the SEEK PSCAN up or down arrow to scrollthrough the main menu.

4. Scroll until OIL LIFE appears on the display.

5. Press the 1 PREV or 2 NEXT buttons to enter thesubmenu. RESET will be displayed.

6. Press the TUNE DISP button to reset. A chime willbe heard to verify the new setting and DONE willbe displayed for one second.

7. Once the indicator has been reset, scroll until EXITappears on the display.

8. Press the TUNE DISP button to exit programming.A chime will be heard to verify the exit.

5-21

Using the Accelerator Pedal1. Turn the ignition to ON, with the engine off.

2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal threetimes within five seconds. If the CHANGE ENGINEOIL message flashes, the system is reset.However, if it stays on, it did not reset. You’ll needto repeat the reset procedure.

What to Do with Used OilUsed engine oil contains certain elements that may beunhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.Don’t let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Cleanyour skin and nails with soap and water, or a goodhand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing orrags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’swarnings about the use and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If youchange your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from thefilter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting itin the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or intostreams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it bytaking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have aproblem properly disposing of your used oil, askyour dealer, a service station or a local recycling centerfor help.

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/FilterInspect the air cleaner/filter at every oil change andreplace at the first oil change after 25,000 miles(40,000 km).

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/FilterTo inspect the air cleaner/filter remove the filter from thevehicle and lightly shake filter to release loose dustand dirt. If the filter remains “caked” with dirt, a new filteris required.

5-22

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 forlocation of air cleaner/filter.

1. To check or replace the engine air cleaner/filter dothe following:Loosen the two clips on the top of the engine aircleaner/filter housing and lift the filter cover tabs outof the housing.

2. Push the filter cover housing toward the engine.

3. Pull out the filter.

4. Check or install a new engine air cleaner/filter. SeeNormal Maintenance Replacement Parts onpage 5-105.

5. To reinstall the cover, position the tabs through theslots on the housing. A notch on the sides of thefilter cover will indicate the correct engagement.Reinstall the two clips on the top of the housingwhen you are finished.

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine whento replace the air filter.

See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-5.

{CAUTION:

Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filteroff can cause you or others to be burned. Theair cleaner not only cleans the air, it helps tostop flame if the engine backfires. If it isn’tthere and the engine backfires, you could beburned. Don’t drive with it off, and be carefulworking on the engine with the air cleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire cancause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt caneasily get into your engine, which will damage it.Always have the air cleaner/filter in place whenyou’re driving.

5-23

Automatic Transaxle Fluid

When to Check and ChangeA good time to check your automatic transaxle fluidlevel is when the engine oil is changed.

Change both the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles(83 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one ormore of these conditions:

• In heavy city traffic where the outside temperatureregularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.

• In hilly or mountainous terrain.

• When doing frequent trailer towing.

• Uses such as found in taxi, police or deliveryservice.

If you do not use your vehicle under any of theseconditions, change the fluid and filter at 100,000 miles(166 000 km).

See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-5.

How to CheckBecause this operation can be a little difficult, you maychoose to have this done at the dealership servicedepartment.If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructionshere, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.

Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damageyour transaxle. Too much can mean that some of thefluid could come out and fall on hot engine orexhaust system parts, starting a fire. Too little fluidcould cause the transaxle to overheat. Be sureto get an accurate reading if you check yourtransaxle fluid.Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transaxlefluid level if you have been driving:• When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).• At high speed for quite a while.• In heavy traffic – especially in hot weather.• While pulling a trailer.

To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normaloperating temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F(82°C to 93°C).

Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles(24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50°F(10°C). If it’s colder than 50°F (10°C), you may have todrive longer.

5-24

Checking the Fluid LevelPrepare your vehicle as follows:

• Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep theengine running.

• With the parking brake applied, place the shift leverin PARK (P).

• With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shiftlever through each gear range, pausing for aboutthree seconds in each range. Then, position the shiftlever in PARK (P).

• Let the engine run at idle for three to five minutes.

Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:

The transaxle fluid dipstick handle is the black loop nearthe rear of the engine compartment, toward thecenter. See Engine Compartment Overview onpage 5-12 for more information on location.

1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag orpaper towel.

2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds andthen pull it back out again.



5-25

3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lowerlevel. The fluid level must be in the cross-hatchedarea.

4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push thedipstick back in all the way.

How to Add FluidRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine whatkind of transaxle fluid to use. See Part D:Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-16.

If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the properfluid to bring the level into the cross-hatched area onthe dipstick.

1. Pull out the dipstick.

2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid at thedipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.It doesn’t take much fluid, generally less thanone pint (0.5 L). Don’t overfill.

Notice: We recommend you use only fluid labeledDEXRON®–III, because fluid with that label ismade especially for your automatic transaxle.Damage caused by fluid other than DEXRON ®–III isnot covered by your new vehicle warranty.

3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level asdescribed under “How to Check” earlier inthis section.

4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, push thedipstick back in all the way.



5-26

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in your vehicle is filled withDEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designedto remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you addonly DEX-COOL® extended life coolant.

The following explains your cooling system and how toadd coolant when it is low. If you have a problemwith engine overheating or if you need to add coolant toyour radiator, see Engine Overheating on page 5-30.

A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL® coolant will:

• Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).

• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).

• Protect against rust and corrosion.

• Help keep the proper engine temperature.

• Let the warning lights and gages work as theyshould.

Notice: When adding coolant, it is important thatyou use only DEX-COOL ® (silicate-free) coolant.If coolant other than DEX-COOL ® is added tothe system, premature engine, heater core orradiator corrosion may result. In addition, the enginecoolant will require change sooner -- at 30,000 miles(50,000 km) or 24 months, whichever occurs first.Damage caused by the use of coolant otherthan DEX-COOL ® is not covered by your new vehiclewarranty.

5-27

What to UseUse a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water andone-half DEX-COOL® coolant which won’t damagealuminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture,you don’t need to add anything else.

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, can boilbefore the proper coolant mixture will. Yourvehicle’s coolant warning system is set for theproper coolant mixture. With plain water or thewrong mixture, your engine could get too hotbut you wouldn’t get the overheat warning.Your engine could catch fire and you or otherscould be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL ® coolant.

Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.The repair cost wouldn’t be covered by yourwarranty. Too much water in the mixture can freezeand crack the engine, radiator, heater core andother parts.

If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,have your dealer check your cooling system.

Notice: If you use the proper coolant, you don’thave to add extra inhibitors or additives which claimto improve the system. These can be harmful.

Checking Coolant

The coolant recovery tankis located between thepower steering fluidreservoir and theunderhood fuse block inthe engine compartmenton the passenger’s side ofthe vehicle. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 5-12 for moreinformation on location.

The vehicle must be on a level surface. When yourengine is cold, the coolant level should be at the COLDmark or a little higher. When your engine is warm,the level should be up to the HOT mark or a little higher.

5-28

Adding CoolantIf you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL®

coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank, but becareful not to spill it.

If the coolant recovery tank is completely empty, addcoolant to the radiator. See Engine Overheatingon page 5-30.

{CAUTION:

Turning the radiator pressure cap when theengine and radiator are hot can allow steamand scalding liquids to blow out and burn youbadly. With the coolant recovery tank, you willalmost never have to add coolant at theradiator. Never turn the radiator pressurecap — even a little — when the engine andradiator are hot.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant on hotengine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,and it will burn if the engine parts are hotenough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.

Occasionally check the coolant level in the radiator. Forinformation on how to add coolant to the radiator,see Cooling System on page 5-33.

5-29

Radiator Pressure CapNotice: Your radiator cap is a pressure-type capand must be tightly installed to prevent coolant lossand possible engine damage from overheating.Be sure the arrows on the cap line up with theoverflow tube on the radiator filler neck.

The radiator pressure cap is located in the front of theengine compartment on the passenger’s side, nearthe diagonal cross brace. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 5-12 for more information on location.

Engine OverheatingYou will find a coolant temperature gage and a warningmessage about a hot engine on your instrumentpanel cluster. See Engine Coolant Temperature Gageon page 3-36 and Hot Coolant Temperature WarningMessage on page 3-42.

Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating ModeThis emergency operating mode allows your vehicle tobe driven to a safe place in an emergency situation.If an overheated engine condition exists, an overheatprotection mode which alternates firing groups ofcylinders helps prevent engine damage. In this mode,you will notice a significant loss in power and engineperformance. The low coolant light may come onand the temperature gage will indicate an overheatcondition exists. Driving extended miles (km) and/ortowing a trailer in the overheat protection mode shouldbe avoided.

Notice: After driving in the overheated engineprotection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,allow the engine to cool before attempting anyrepair. The engine oil will be severely degraded.Repair the cause of coolant loss, change the oiland reset the oil life system. See “Engine Oil” inthe Index.

5-30

If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine

{CAUTION:

Steam from an overheated engine can burnyou badly, even if you just open the hood. Stayaway from the engine if you see or hear steamcoming from it. Just turn it off and geteveryone away from the vehicle until it cools



down. Wait until there is no sign of steam orcoolant before you open the hood.

If you keep driving when your engine isoverheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. Youor others could be badly burned. Stop yourengine if it overheats, and get out of thevehicle until the engine is cool.

See “Overheated Engine Protection OperatingMode” in the Index for information on drivingto a safe place in an emergency.

Notice: If your engine catches fire because youkeep driving with no coolant, your vehicle canbe badly damaged. The costly repairs would not becovered by your warranty. See “OverheatedEngine Protection Operating Mode” in the Index forinformation on driving to a safe place in anemergency.

5-31

If No Steam Is Coming From YourEngineAn overheat warning along with a low coolant messagecan indicate a serious problem.

If you get an engine overheat warning, but see or hearno steam, the problem may not be too serious.Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:

• Climb a long hill on a hot day.

• Stop after high-speed driving.

• Idle for long periods in traffic.

• Tow a trailer.

If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,try this for a minute or so:

1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL (N)while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road,shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)l and let theengine idle.

2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fanspeed and open the window as necessary.

If you no longer have the overheat warning, you candrive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.If the warning doesn’t come back on, you candrive normally.

If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park yourvehicle right away.

If there’s still no sign of steam, you can idle the enginefor three minutes while you’re parked. If you stillhave the warning, turn off the engine and get everyoneout of the vehicle until it cools down. Also, see“Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode” listedpreviously in this section.

You may decide not to lift the hood but to get servicehelp right away.

5-32

Cooling SystemWhen you decide it’s safe to lift the hood, here’s whatyou’ll see:

A. Engine Coolant Recovery TankB. Electric Engine Cooling FansC. Radiator Pressure Cap

A. Engine Coolant Recovery TankB. Electric Engine Cooling FansC. Radiator Pressure Cap3400 V6 Engine

3800 V6 Engine

5-33

{CAUTION:

An electric engine cooling fan under the hoodcan start up even when the engine is notrunning and can injure you. Keep hands,clothing and tools away from any underhoodelectric fan.

If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling,don’t do anything else until it cools down. The vehicleshould be parked on a level surface.

The coolant level shouldbe at or above the COLDmark on the coolantrecovery tank.

To check the coolant level, look for the COLD mark onthe side of the coolant recovery tank that faces theengine. When the engine is cold, the coolant levelshould be at or above the COLD mark on the coolantrecovery tank. If it isn’t, you may have a leak at thepressure cap or in the radiator hoses, heater hoses,radiator, water pump or somewhere else in thecooling system.

{CAUTION:

Heater and radiator hoses, and other engineparts, can be very hot. Don’t touch them. If youdo, you can be burned.

Don’t run the engine if there is a leak. If yourun the engine, it could lose all coolant. Thatcould cause an engine fire, and you could beburned. Get any leak fixed before you drive thevehicle.

If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, checkto see if the electric engine cooling fans are running.If the engine is overheating, both fans should berunning. If they aren’t, your vehicle needs service.

5-34

Notice: Engine damage from running your enginewithout coolant isn’t covered by your warranty.See “Overheated Engine Protection OperatingMode” in the Index for information on driving to asafe place in an emergency.

Notice: When adding coolant, it is important thatyou use only DEX-COOL ® (silicate-free) coolant.If coolant other than DEX-COOL ® is added tothe system, premature engine, heater core orradiator corrosion may result. In addition, the enginecoolant will require change sooner — at 30,000 miles(50 000 km) or 24 months, whichever occurs first.Damage caused by the use of coolant otherthan DEX-COOL ® is not covered by your newvehicle warranty.

How to Add Coolant to the CoolantRecovery TankIf you haven’t found a problem yet, but the coolant levelisn’t at the COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL® engine coolant atthe coolant recovery tank. See Engine Coolant onpage 5-27

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, can boilbefore the proper coolant mixture will. Yourvehicle’s coolant warning system is set for theproper coolant mixture. With plain water or thewrong mixture, your engine could get too hotbut you wouldn’t get the overheat warning.Your engine could catch fire and you or otherscould be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL ® coolant.

5-35

Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crackthe engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.Use the recommended coolant and the propercoolant mixture.

The coolant recovery tank is located in the rear of theengine compartment on the passenger’s side of thevehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview onpage 5-12

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant on hotengine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine parts are hotenough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.

When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at theCOLD mark, start your vehicle.

If the overheat warning continues, there’s one morething you can try. You can add the proper coolantmixture directly to the radiator, but be sure the coolingsystem is cool before you do it.

5-36

{CAUTION:

Steam and scalding liquids from a hot coolingsystem can blow out and burn you badly. Theyare under pressure, and if you turn the radiatorpressure cap -- even a little -- they can comeout at high speed. Never turn the cap when thecooling system, including the radiator pressurecap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system andradiator pressure cap to cool if you ever haveto turn the pressure cap.

5-37

How to Add Coolant to the Radiator

Notice: Your engine has a specific radiatorfill procedure. Failure to follow this procedure couldcause your engine to overheat and be severelydamaged.

The radiator pressure cap is located in the front of theengine compartment near the diagonal cross braceon the passenger’s side of the vehicle. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 5-12

1. Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise untilit first stops. (Don’t press down while turning thepressure cap.)If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hissmeans there is still some pressure left.

5-38

2. Then keep turning the pressure cap, but now pushdown as you turn it. Remove the pressure cap.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant on hotengine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine parts are hotenough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.

3. If you have the 3800 V6 engine, remove the3800 Series II V6 engine cover shield to access thebleed valve.

3.1. Clean the area around the engine oil fill tubeand cap before removing. Twist the oil filltube, with cap attached, counterclockwiseand remove it.

3.2. Lift the engine cover shield at the front, slidethe catch tab out of the engine bracket andremove the cover shield.

3.3. Put the oil fill tube, with cap attached, in thevalve cover oil fill hole until you’re ready toreplace the cover shield.

5-39

4. After the engine cools, open the coolant air bleedvalve or valves.

3400 V6 engine: There are two bleed valves. Oneis located on the thermostat housing. The otheris located on the thermostat bypass tube.

3800 V6 engine: There is one bleed valve. It islocated on the thermostat housing.

3400 V6 BLEEDVALVE #1

3400 V6 BLEEDVALVE #2 3800 Series II V6 Bleed Valve

5-40

5. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOL®

coolant mixture, up to the base of the fillerneck. See Engine Coolant on page 5-27If you see a stream of coolant coming from an airbleed valve, close the valve. Otherwise, closethe valves after the radiator is filled.

6. Rinse or wipe any spilled coolant from the engineand the compartment.

7. If you have the 3800 V6 engine, replace the 3800Series II V6 engine cover shield.

7.1. Remove the oil fill tube, with cap attached,from the valve cover.

7.2. Insert the catch tab on the cover shieldunder the bracket on the engine.

7.3. Place the hole in the cover shield over thehole in the valve cover. Install oil fill tube andcap by twisting clockwise.

8. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the COLDmark.

9. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank, butleave the radiator pressure cap off.

5-41

10. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel theupper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for theengine cooling fans.

11. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiatorfiller neck may be lower. If the level is lower, addmore of the proper DEX-COOL® coolant mixturethrough the filler neck until the level reachesthe base of the filler neck.

12. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time duringthis procedure if coolant begins to flow out of thefiller neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Be surethe arrow on the pressure cap lines up like this.

13. Check the coolant in the recovery tank. The level inthe coolant recovery tank should be at the HOTmark when the engine is hot or at the COLD markwhen the engine is cold.

5-42

Power Steering FluidThe power steering fluid reservoir is located toward therear of the engine compartment, on the passenger’sside of the vehicle.

It will have the above symbol on its cap. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 5-12.

When to Check Power Steering FluidIt is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluidunless you suspect there is a leak in the system oryou hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this systemcould indicate a problem. Have the system inspectedand repaired. See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 5-12 for reservoir location.

How to Check Power Steering FluidTurn the key off, let the engine compartment cool down,wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean, thenunscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag.Replace the cap and completely tighten it. Thenremove the cap again and look at the fluid level onthe dipstick.

When the 3400 V6 engine compartment is hot, the levelshould be at the H (hot) mark. When it’s cold, thelevel should be at the C (cold) mark. If the fluid is at theADD mark, you should add fluid.

For the 3800 V6 engine, the level should be at the HOTmark when the engine compartment is hot. If the fluidis at the ADD mark, you should add fluid.

5-43

What to UseTo determine what kind of fluid to use, see Part D:Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-16.Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the properfluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.

Windshield Washer Fluid

What to UseWhen you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to readthe manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you willbe operating your vehicle in an area where thetemperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that hassufficient protection against freezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

When this message is displayed, it means the vehicle islow on windshield washer fluid. You should add morewindshield washer fluid soon.

Open the cap with thewasher symbol on it. Addwasher fluid until thetank is full.EngineCompartment Overview onpage 5-12 for moreinformation on location.


5-44

Notice:

• When using concentrated washer fluid,follow the manufacturer’s instructions foradding water.

• Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solution to freeze anddamage your washer fluid tank and other partsof the washer system. Also, water doesn’tclean as well as washer fluid.

• Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quartersfull when it’s very cold. This allows forexpansion if freezing occurs, which coulddamage the tank if it is completely full.

• Don’t use engine coolant (antifreeze) in yourwindshield washer. It can damage yourwasher system and paint.

Brakes

Brake Fluid

Your brake master cylinder reservoir is filled with DOT-3brake fluid. See Engine Compartment Overview onpage 5-12 for the location of the reservoir.

5-45

There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level inthe reservoir might go down. The first is that thebrake fluid goes down to an acceptable level duringnormal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in,the fluid level goes back up. The other reason isthat fluid is leaking out of the brake system. If it is, youshould have your brake system fixed, since a leakmeans that sooner or later your brakes won’t work well,or won’t work at all.

So, it isn’t a good idea to “top off” your brake fluid.Adding brake fluid won’t correct a leak. If you add fluidwhen your linings are worn, then you’ll have toomuch fluid when you get new brake linings. You shouldadd (or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only whenwork is done on the brake hydraulic system.

{CAUTION:

If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill onthe engine. The fluid will burn if the engine ishot enough. You or others could be burned,and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brakefluid only when work is done on the brakehydraulic system.

When your brake fluid falls to a low level, your brakewarning light will come on. See Brake System WarningLight on page 3-34.

What to AddWhen you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brakefluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed containeronly. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricantson page 6-16.

Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the areaaround the cap before removing it. This will helpkeep dirt from entering the reservoir.

{CAUTION:

With the wrong kind of fluid in your brakesystem, your brakes may not work well, orthey may not even work at all. This couldcause a crash. Always use the proper brakefluid.

5-46

Notice:

• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brakesystem parts. For example, just a few drops ofmineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in yourbrake system can damage brake systemparts so badly that they’ll have to be replaced.Don’t let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.

• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s paintedsurfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Becareful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle. Ifyou do, wash it off immediately. See“Appearance Care” in the Index.

Brake WearYour vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.

Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that makea high-pitched warning sound when the brake padsare worn and new pads are needed. The soundmay come and go or be heard all the time your vehicleis moving (except when you are pushing on thebrake pedal firmly).

{CAUTION:

The brake wear warning sound means thatsoon your brakes won’t work well. That couldlead to an accident. When you hear the brakewear warning sound, have your vehicleserviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brakepads could result in costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brakesqueal when the brakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not mean something is wrong withyour brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to helpprevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspectbrake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts inthe proper sequence to GM torque specifications.

Brake linings should always be replaced as completeaxle sets.

See Brake System Inspection on page 6-15.

5-47

Brake Pedal TravelSee your dealer if the brake pedal does not return tonormal height, or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.

Brake AdjustmentEvery time you apply the brakes, with or without thevehicle moving, your brakes adjust for wear.

Replacing Brake System PartsThe braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its manyparts have to be of top quality and work well together ifthe vehicle is to have really good braking. Yourvehicle was designed and tested with top-quality GMbrake parts. When you replace parts of your brakingsystem — for example, when your brake liningswear down and you need new ones put in — be sureyou get new approved GM replacement parts. Ifyou don’t, your brakes may no longer work properly. Forexample, if someone puts in brake linings that arewrong for your vehicle, the balance between your frontand rear brakes can change — for the worse. Thebraking performance you’ve come to expect can changein many other ways if someone puts in the wrongreplacement brake parts.

BatteryYour new vehicle comes with a maintenance freeACDelco® battery. When it’s time for a new battery, getone that has the replacement number shown on theoriginal battery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco®

battery. See Engine Compartment Overview onpage 5-12 for battery location.Warning: Battery posts, terminals and relatedaccessories contain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State of California to causecancer and reproductive harm. Wash handsafter handling.

5-48

Vehicle StorageIf you’re not going to drive your vehicle for 25 daysor more, remove the black, negative (−) cable from thebattery. This will help keep your battery fromrunning down.

{CAUTION:

Batteries have acid that can burn you and gasthat can explode. You can be badly hurt if youaren’t careful. See “Jump Starting” next fortips on working around a battery withoutgetting hurt.

Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare yourvehicle for longer storage periods.

Also, for your audio system, see Theft-DeterrentFeature on page 3-89.

Jump StartingIf your battery has run down, you may want to useanother vehicle and some jumper cables to start yourvehicle. Be sure to follow the steps below to do it safely.

{CAUTION:

Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerousbecause:

• They contain acid that can burn you.• They contain gas that can explode or

ignite.• They contain enough electricity to burn

you.

If you don’t follow these steps exactly, someor all of these things can hurt you.

5-49

Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costlydamage to your vehicle that wouldn’t be coveredby your warranty.

Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling itwon’t work, and it could damage your vehicle.

Notice: If the other system isn’t a 12-volt systemwith a negative ground, both vehicles can bedamaged.

1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12–voltbattery with a negative ground system.

2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cablescan reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touchingeach other. If they are, it could cause a groundconnection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be able tostart your vehicle, and the bad grounding coulddamage the electrical systems.To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, setthe parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved inthe jump start procedure. Put an automatictransaxle in PARK (P) or a manual transaxle inNEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.

Notice: If you leave your radio on, it could be badlydamaged. The repairs wouldn’t be covered byyour warranty.

3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplugunnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarettelighter or in the accessory power outlets. Turn offthe radio and all lamps that aren’t needed. This willavoid sparks and help save both batteries. And itcould save your radio!

4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find thepositive (+) and negative (−) terminal locations oneach vehicle.You will not need to access your battery for jumpstarting. Your vehicle has a remote positive (+) jumpstarting terminal for that purpose. The remotepositive (+) terminal is located in the enginecompartment on the passenger’s side of the vehicle,next to the upper underhood fuse block. SeeEngine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 formore information on location.

5-50

To uncover the remote positive (+) terminal, lift theplastic cap. You should always use the remotepositive (+) terminal instead of the positive (+)terminal on the battery.

{CAUTION:

An electric fan can start up even when theengine is not running and can injure you. Keephands, clothing and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:

Using a match near a battery can cause batterygas to explode. People have been hurt doingthis, and some have been blinded. Use aflashlight if you need more light.

Be sure the battery has enough water. Youdon’t need to add water to the ACDelco ®

battery installed in your new vehicle. But if abattery has filler caps, be sure the rightamount of fluid is there. If it is low, add waterto take care of that first. If you don’t, explosivegas could be present.

Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.Don’t get it on you. If you accidentally get it inyour eyes or on your skin, flush the place withwater and get medical help immediately.

5-51

{CAUTION:

Fans or other moving engine parts can injureyou badly. Keep your hands away from movingparts once the engine is running.

5. Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose ormissing insulation. If they do, you could get ashock. The vehicles could be damaged, too.Before you connect the cables, here are somebasic things you should know. Positive (+) will go topositive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal ifthe vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,unpainted metal engine part or to a remotenegative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.Don’t connect positive (+) to negative (−), or you’llget a short that would damage the battery andmaybe other parts, too. And don’t connectthe negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminalon the dead battery because this can cause sparks.

6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)terminal location of the vehicle with the deadbattery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if thevehicle has one.

5-52

7. Don’t let the other endtouch metal. Connect itto the positive (+)terminal location of thevehicle with thegood battery. Use aremote positive (+)terminal if the vehiclehas one.

8. Now connect the blacknegative (−) cable tothe negative (−)terminal location of thevehicle with thegood battery. Use aremote negative (−)terminal if the vehiclehas one.

Don’t let the other end touch anything until the nextstep. The other end of the negative (−) cabledoesn’t go to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy,unpainted metal part or to a remote negative (−)terminal on the vehicle with the dead battery.

9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable atleast 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery,but not near engine parts that move. The electricalconnection is just as good there, and the chanceof sparks getting back to the battery is much less.

10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and runthe engine for a while.

5-53

11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery. Ifit won’t start after a few tries, it probably needsservice.

Notice: Damage to your vehicle may result fromelectrical shorting if jumper cables are removedincorrectly. To prevent electrical shorting, take carethat the cables don’t touch each other or anyother metal. The repairs wouldn’t be covered byyour warranty.

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine PartB. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) TerminalC. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal

To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, dothe following:

1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from thevehicle that had the dead battery.

2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the othervehicle.

5. Return the remote positive (+) terminal cover to itsoriginal position.

Jumper Cable Removal

5-54

Headlamp AimingIf your vehicle is damaged in an accident, the headlampaim may be affected. Aim adjustment to the low beammay be necessary if it is difficult to see lane markers (forhorizontal aim), or if oncoming drivers flash their highbeams at you (for vertical aim). If you believe yourheadlamps need to be re-aimed, we recommend thatyou take your vehicle to the dealer for service. However,it is possible for you to re-aim your headlamps byfollowing the procedure in the service manual foryour vehicle.

Notice: To make sure your headlamps are aimedproperly, read all the instructions before beginning.Failure to follow these instructions could causedamage to headlamp parts.

5-55

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacement bulb, seeReplacement Bulbs on page 5-59.

For any bulb changing procedure not listed in thissection, contact your dealer.

Halogen Bulbs

{CAUTION:

Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas insideand can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb.You or others could be injured. Be sure to readand follow the instructions on the bulbpackage.

Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, andParking Lamps

A. Parking/Turn Signal LampB. Low-Beam HeadlampC. High-Beam Headlamp

5-56

1. Open the hood.

2. Remove the air baffle.

3. Remove the two headlamp fasteners by pulling upon them.

4. Gently pull the headlamp assembly away from thevehicle and remove the electrical connector.

5. Remove the round dust caps to gain access tothe bulbs.

6. Turn the old bulb counterclockwise and remove itfrom the retaining ring by gently pulling it awayfrom the headlamp.

7. Remove the electrical connector from the bulb byraising the lock tab and pulling the connector awayfrom the bulb’s base.

8. Install the electrical connector to the bulb.

5-57

9. Install the new bulb by inserting the smallest tab onthe bulb base into the matching notch in theretaining ring. Turn the bulb a quarter-turn clockwiseuntil it stops.

10. Reverse Steps 1 through 5 to reinstall the headlampassembly. Then, check the lamps.

Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplampsand Sidemarker Lamps

A. Rear Sidemarker LampB. Taillamps/Turn Signal and Stoplamp

1. Open the trunk. Remove the convenience net, ifyour vehicle has one. Unhook the net from theupper wing nut.

2. Remove the two upper (convenience net) wingnuts.

3. Pull the carpet away from the rear of the vehicle.4. Unscrew the

two remainingwing nuts.

5. Pull the assembly from the body carefully.

6. To remove a socket, press the tab, turn the socketcounterclockwise and pull it out.

7. Pull the old bulb out. Do not twist it.

8. Push the new bulb into the socket.

9. Reinstall the socket in the assembly. Tighten thesocket by turning it clockwise.

5-58

10. Reinstall the assembly and the two lower wing nuts.

11. Reinstall the carpeting.

12. Reinstall the upper (convenience net) wing nut andconvenience net, if equipped.

Back-Up LampsThe back-up lamps are located in the applique on therear of the trunk lid.

1. Open the trunk.

2. Remove the nine wing nuts.

3. Pull the rear trunk applique away from the vehicle.

4. To remove a socket press the tab, turn thesocket counterclockwise and pull it out.

5. Pull the old bulb out. Do not twist it.

6. Push the new bulb into the socket.

7. Reinstall the socket in the assembly. Tighten thesocket by turning it clockwise.

8. Reinstall the applique and the nine wing nuts.

Replacement BulbsExterior Lamp Bulb Number

Back-Up 921

Front Parking/Turn Signal 3357NAK or3457NAK

Headlamps, High-Beam 9005Headlamps, Low-Beam 9006Taillamps/Stop lamps/Turn Signal 3057

For any bulb not listed here, contact your dealer.

5-59

Windshield Wiper BladeReplacementWindshield wiper blades should be inspected at leasttwice a year for wear or cracking. See “WindshieldWipers, Blade Check” under At Least Twice a Year onpage 6-11 for more information.

Replacement blades come in different types and areremoved in different ways. For proper type and length,see Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts onpage 5-105. Here’s how to remove the wiper blades:

1. Turn on the wipers to the low wipe setting.

2. Turn off the ignition while the wipers are at theouter positions of the wiper pattern. The bladesare more accessible for removal/replacement whilein this position.

3. Pull the windshield wiper arm away from thewindshield.

4. While holding the wiper arm away from the glass,push the release clip from under the bladeconnecting point and pull the old blade assemblydown toward the glass to remove it from thewiper arm.

5. Push the new wiper blade securely on the wiperarm until you hear the release clip “click”into place.

5-60

TiresYour new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made bya leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questionsabout your tire warranty and where to obtain service,see your Chevrolet Warranty booklet for details.

{CAUTION:

Poorly maintained and improperly used tiresare dangerous.

• Overloading your tires can causeoverheating as a result of too muchfriction. You could have an air-out and aserious accident. See “Loading YourVehicle” in the Index.



• Underinflated tires pose the same dangeras overloaded tires. The resulting accidentcould cause serious injury. Check all tiresfrequently to maintain the recommendedpressure. Tire pressure should be checkedwhen your tires are cold.

• Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut,punctured or broken by a sudden impact— such as when you hit a pothole. Keeptires at the recommended pressure.

• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. Ifyour tread is badly worn, or if your tireshave been damaged, replace them.

5-61

Inflation -- Tire PressureThe Tire-Loading Information label, which is on theinside of the trunk lid, shows the correct inflationpressures for your tires when they’re cold. “Cold” meansyour vehicle has been sitting for at least three hoursor driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Notice: Don’t let anyone tell you that underinflationor overinflation is all right. It’s not. If your tiresdon’t have enough air (underinflation), you can getthe following:

• Too much flexing

• Too much heat

• Tire overloading

• Bad wear

• Bad handling

• Bad fuel economy

If your tires have too much air (overinflation), youcan get the following:

• Unusual wear

• Bad handling

• Rough ride

• Needless damage from road hazards

When to CheckCheck your tires once a month or more.

Don’t forget your compact spare tire. It should be at60 psi (420 kPa).

How to CheckUse a good quality pocket-type gage to check tirepressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflatedsimply by looking at them. Radial tires may lookproperly inflated even when they’re underinflated.

Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valvestems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirtand moisture.

5-62

Tire Pressure Monitor SystemIf your vehicle has the tire pressure monitor system, itcan alert you to a large change in the pressure ofone tire. The system “learns” the pressure at each tirethroughout the operating speed range of your vehicle.The system normally takes between 45 and 90 minutesof driving to learn the tire pressures. This time maybe longer depending on your individual driving habits.Learning need not be accumulated during a singletrip. Once learned, the system will remember the tirepressures until the system is recalibrated.

After the system has learned tire pressures withproperly inflated tires, the LOW TIRE PRESSUREmessage will come on if the pressure in one tirebecomes 12 psi (83 kPa) lower than the other threetires. The tire pressure monitor system won’t alert you ifthe pressure in more than one tire is low, if thesystem is not properly calibrated, or if the vehicle ismoving faster than 70 mph (110 km/h).

The tire pressure monitor system detects differences intire rotation speeds that are caused by changes intire pressure. The system can alert you about a lowtire — but it doesn’t replace normal tire maintenance.See Tires on page 5-61.

When the LOW TIRE PRESSURE message comes on,you should stop as soon as you can and check allyour tires for damage. (If a tire is flat, see If a Tire GoesFlat on page 5-71.) Also check the tire pressure in allfour tires as soon as you can. See Inflation -- TirePressure on page 5-62.

The LOW TIRE PRESSURE message will also bedisplayed (while the ignition is on) until you reset(calibrate) the system.

Don’t reset the tire pressure monitor system without firstcorrecting the cause of the problem and checkingand adjusting the pressure in all four tires. If you resetthe system when the tire pressures are incorrect,the system will not work properly and may not alert youwhen a tire is low.

Any time you adjust a tire’s pressure, rotate your tires,or have one or more tires repaired or replaced, you’llneed to reset (calibrate) the tire pressure monitorsystem. You’ll also need to reset the system wheneveryou buy new tires and whenever the vehicle’s batteryhas been disconnected.

To reset (calibrate) the system: The tire pressuremonitor system can be reset two ways. With the ignitionposition at ON, pull the interior lamps control to theON and OFF settings three times.

5-63

It can also be reset through the radio using the followingsteps:

1. Turn the ignition to ACC or ON and turn the radiooff.

2. Press and hold the TUNE DISP button on the radiofor at least five seconds until SETTINGS isdisplayed.

3. Press the SEEK SCAN up or down arrow to scrollthrough the main menu.

4. Scroll until TIRE MON appears on the display.

5. Press the 1 PREV or 2 NEXT button to enter thesubmenu. RESET will be displayed.

6. Press the TUNE DISP button to reset. A chime willbe heard to verify the new setting and DONE willbe displayed for one second.

7. Once the monitor has been reset, scroll until EXITappears on the display.

8. Press the TUNE DISP button to exit programming.A chime will be heard to verify exit.

The system completes the calibration processduring driving.

The system normally takes 15 to 20 minutes of drivingin each of three speed ranges to ″learn″ tire pressures.The speed ranges are 15 to 4 mph (25 to 65 km/h),40 to 65 mph (65 to 105 km/h) and above 65 mph(105 km/h). When learning is complete, the system willalert you after two to eight minutes if a tire is 12 psi(83 kPa) different from the other three tires. Detectionthresholds may be higher and detection times maybe longer on rough roads, curves and at high speeds.The system is not capable of detection at speeds greaterthan 70 mph (110 km/h).

5-64

Tire Inspection and RotationTires should be rotated every 7,500 miles (12 500 km).

Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tiresas soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Alsocheck for damaged tires or wheels. See When It Is Timefor New Tires on page 5-66 and Wheel Replacementon page 5-69 for more information.

The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve moreuniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotationis the most important. See “Part A: ScheduledMaintenance Services,” in Section 6, for scheduledrotation intervals.

When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotationpattern shown here.

Don’t include the compact spare tire in your tire rotation.

After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front andrear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire-LoadingInformation label.

Reset the Tire Inflation Monitor System. See TirePressure Monitor System on page 5-63.

Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened.See “Wheel Nut Torque” under Capacities andSpecifications on page 5-103.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make wheel nutsbecome loose after a time. The wheel couldcome off and cause an accident. When youchange a wheel, remove any rust or dirt fromplaces where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.In an emergency, you can use a cloth or apaper towel to do this; but be sure to use ascraper or wire brush later, if you need to, toget all the rust or dirt off. See “Changing a FlatTire” in the Index.

5-65

When It Is Time for New Tires

One way to tell when it’stime for new tires is tocheck the treadwearindicators, which willappear when your tireshave only 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) or less of treadremaining.

You need a new tire if any of the following statementsare true:

• You can see the indicators at three or more placesaround the tire.

• You can see cord or fabric showing through thetire’s rubber.

• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snaggeddeep enough to show cord or fabric.

• The tire has a bump, bulge or split.

• The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage thatcan’t be repaired well because of the size orlocation of the damage.

5-66

Buying New TiresTo find out what kind and size of tires you need, look atthe Tire-Loading Information label.

The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new hada Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires,get ones with that same TPC Spec number. That wayyour vehicle will continue to have tires that are designedto give proper endurance, handling, speed rating,traction, ride and other things during normal service onyour vehicle. If your tires have an all-season treaddesign, the TPC number will be followed by an “MS” (formud and snow).

If you ever replace your tires with those not having aTPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size,load range, speed rating and construction type (bias,bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.

{CAUTION:

Mixing tires could cause you to lose controlwhile driving. If you mix tires of different sizesor types (radial and bias-belted tires), thevehicle may not handle properly, and youcould have a crash. Using tires of differentsizes may also cause damage to your vehicle.Be sure to use the same size and type tires onall wheels. It’s all right to drive with yourcompact spare temporarily, it was developedfor use on your vehicle. See “Compact SpareTire” in the index.

{CAUTION:

If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, thewheel rim flanges could develop cracks aftermany miles of driving. A tire and/or wheelcould fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use onlyradial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.

5-67

Uniform Tire Quality GradingQuality grades can be found where applicable on thetire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximumsection width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature AThe following information relates to the systemdeveloped by the United States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration, which grades tires bytreadwear, traction and temperature performance. (Thisapplies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)The grades are molded on the sidewalls of mostpassenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Gradingsystem does not apply to deep tread, winter-typesnow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires,tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches(25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires.

While the tires available on General Motors passengercars and light trucks may vary with respect to thesegrades, they must also conform to federal safetyrequirements and additional General Motors TirePerformance Criteria (TPC) standards.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative rating based onthe wear rate of the tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified government test course.For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one anda half (1.5) times as well on the government course asa tire graded 100. The relative performance of tiresdepends upon the actual conditions of their use,however, and may depart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits, service practices anddifferences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction – AA, A, B, CThe traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s abilityto stop on wet pavement as measured under controlledconditions on specified government test surfaces ofasphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poortraction performance. Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead brakingtraction tests, and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

5-68

Temperature – A, B, CThe temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,representing the tire’s resistance to the generationof heat and its ability to dissipate heat when testedunder controlled conditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature cancause the material of the tire to degenerate andreduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead tosudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to alevel of performance which all passenger car tires mustmeet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety StandardNo. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratory test wheel than theminimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, orexcessive loading, either separately or in combination,can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and Tire BalanceThe wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balancedcarefully at the factory to give you the longest tire lifeand best overall performance.

Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing arenot needed. However, if you notice unusual tire wear oryour vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignmentmay need to be reset. If you notice your vehiclevibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheelsmay need to be rebalanced.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly rustedor corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, thewheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced.If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except somealuminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.

5-69

Each new wheel should have the same load-carryingcapacity, diameter, width, offset and be mountedthe same way as the one it replaces.

If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel boltsor wheel nuts, replace them only with new GMoriginal equipment parts. This way, you will be sure tohave the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nutsfor your vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheelbolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can bedangerous. It could affect the braking andhandling of your vehicle, make your tires loseair and make you lose control. You could havea collision in which you or others could beinjured. Always use the correct wheel, wheelbolts and wheel nuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problemswith bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer orodometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chainclearance to the body and chassis.

See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-72 for moreinformation.

Used Replacement Wheels

{CAUTION:

Putting a used wheel on your vehicle isdangerous. You can’t know how it’s been usedor how far it’s been driven. It could failsuddenly and cause a crash. If you have toreplace a wheel, use a new GM originalequipment wheel.

5-70

Tire ChainsNotice: Use tire chains only where legal and onlywhen you must. Use only SAE Class “S” type chainsthat are the proper size for your tires. Install themon the front tires and tighten them as tightly aspossible with the ends securely fastened. Driveslowly and follow the chain manufacturer’sinstructions. If you can hear the chains contactingyour vehicle, stop and retighten them. If the contactcontinues, slow down until it stops. Driving toofast or spinning the wheels with chains on willdamage your vehicle.

If a Tire Goes FlatIt’s unusual for a tire to “blowout” while you’re driving,especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goesout of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly.But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are a fewtips about what to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag thatpulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off theaccelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake toa stop well out of the traffic lane.

A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like askid and may require the same correction you’d usein a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from theaccelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control bysteering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may bevery bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gentlybrake to a stop, well off the road if possible.

5-71

{CAUTION:

Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to domaintenance or repairs is dangerous withoutthe appropriate safety equipment and training.The jack provided with your vehicle isdesigned only for changing a flat tire. If it isused for anything else, you or others could bebadly injured or killed if the vehicle slips offthe jack. Use the jack provided with yourvehicle only for changing a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use yourjacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.

Changing a Flat TireIf a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damageby driving slowly to a level place. Turn on yourhazard warning flashers.

{CAUTION:

Changing a tire can cause an injury. Thevehicle can slip off the jack and roll over youor other people. You and they could be badlyinjured. Find a level place to change your tire.To help prevent the vehicle from moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).

3. Turn off the engine.

To be even more certain the vehicle won’tmove, you can put blocks at the front and rearof the tire farthest away from the one beingchanged. That would be the tire on the otherside of the vehicle, at the opposite end.

5-72

The following steps will tell you how to use the jack andchange a tire.

Removing the Spare Tire and ToolsThe equipment you’ll need is in the trunk. The steps forremoving the compact spare tire and installing it onthe vehicle are listed below.

1. Turn the center nut onthe compact spare tirecover counterclockwiseto remove it. Thenremove the cover.

2. Remove the compact spare tire from the trunk. SeeCompact Spare Tire on page 5-84 for moreinformation about the compact spare.

5-73

3. Turn the nut holding the jack counterclockwise andremove it. Then remove the jack and wrench.

The tools you’ll be using include the jack (A) extensionand protector/guide (B) and wheel wrench (C).

5-74

Removing the Wheel Covers and theWheel Nut CapsRemoving the Center Wheel Cap

Your vehicle may havecenter caps if equippedwith aluminum wheels.

To remove a center cap use the wheel wrench to prygently at the notch in the wheel cap. Don’t use atool that is narrower than the wheel wrench to pry atthe notch.

Removing the Wheel Covers

If your vehicle is equippedwith wheel covers, loosenthe plastic nut capswith the wheel wrench in acounter clockwisedirection.

If needed, you can finish loosening them with yourfingers. Then, using the flat end of the wheel wrench,pry along the edge of the cover until it comes off.The edge of the wheel cover could be sharp, so don’ttry to remove it with your bare hands.

5-75

Removing the Flat Tire and Installingthe Spare Tire

1. Using the wheel wrench, loosen all the wheel nuts.Don’t remove them yet.

{CAUTION:

Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up isdangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack youcould be badly injured or killed. Never getunder a vehicle when it is supported only bya jack.

{CAUTION:

Raising your vehicle with the jack improperlypositioned can damage the vehicle and evenmake the vehicle fall. To help avoid personalinjury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit thejack lift head into the proper location beforeraising the vehicle.

5-76

The diagram shows you where you should placeyour jack to change a front tire. Use the bolts (A) asa guide when positioning the jack lift head (C)near the rear edge of the front wheel opening (B).For jacking at the vehicle’s front location, putthe jack lift about 8.5 inches (21.5 cm) from the rearedge of the front wheel opening in the cutout ofthe rocker panel molding.Put the compact spare tire near you.

The diagram shows you where to place your jack tochange a rear tire. Use the notch (B) as a guidewhen positioning the jack lift head (A) near the frontedge of the rear wheel opening (C).For jacking at the vehicle’s rear location, put thejack lift head about 4 inches (10 cm) from the frontedge of the rear wheel opening in the cutout ofthe rocker panel molding.Put the compact spare tire near you.

Jack Placement for a Front Tire Jack Placement for a Rear Tire

5-77

2. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handleclockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off theground for the compact spare tire to fit underneaththe wheel well of the vehicle. Remove all wheelnuts and take off the flat tire.

3. Remove any rust or dirtfrom the wheel bolts,mounting surfacesand spare wheel.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make the wheel nutsbecome loose after a time. The wheel couldcome off and cause an accident. When youchange a wheel, remove any rust or dirt fromthe places where the wheel attaches to thevehicle. In an emergency, you can use a clothor a paper towel to do this; but be sure to usea scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, toget all the rust or dirt off.

5-78

{CAUTION:

Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. Ifyou do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheelcould fall off, causing a serious accident.

4. Install the compact spare tire.5. Reinstall the wheel

nuts with the roundedend of the nutstoward the wheel.Tighten each nut byhand until the wheel isheld against thehub.

6. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handlecounterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.

5-79

7. Tighten the wheel nutsfirmly in a crisscrosssequence as shown. {CAUTION:

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightenedwheel nuts can cause the wheel to come looseand even come off. This could lead to anaccident. Be sure to use the correct wheelnuts. If you have to replace them, be sure toget new GM original equipment wheel nuts.Stop somewhere as soon as you can and havethe nuts tightened with a torque wrench to theproper torque specification. See “Capacitiesand Specifications” in the Index for wheel nuttorque specification.

5-80

Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can leadto brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoidexpensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheelnuts in the proper sequence and to the propertorque specification. See “Capacities andSpecifications” in the index for the wheel nut torquespecification.

Don’t try to put the wheel cover on your compact sparetire. It won’t fit. Store the wheel cover in the trunkuntil you have the flat tire repaired or replaced.

Notice: Wheel covers won’t fit on your compactspare. If you try to put a wheel cover on yourcompact spare, you could damage the cover or thespare.

Storing the Flat Tire and Tools

{CAUTION:

Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in thepassenger compartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,loose equipment could strike someone. Storeall these in the proper place.

5-81

After you’ve put the compact spare tire on your vehicle,you’ll need to store the flat tire in the trunk. Use thefollowing procedure to secure the flat tire in the trunk.

When storing a full-size tire, use the extension andprotector guide located in the foam holder to helpprevent wheel surface damage.

To store a full-size tire do the following:

1. Place the tire in the trunk, valve stem facing downwith the protector/guide through a wheel bolt hole.

2. Remove the protector/guide and attach the retainersecurely. The cover will not fit over a full-size tire,so be sure to store the cover as far forward aspossible.

3. When you put the compact spare tire back in thetrunk, place the protector/guide back in the foamholder.

4. Put the cover back over the compact spare tire andtighten the center nut.

5-82

Storing the Spare Tire and Tools

{CAUTION:

Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in thepassenger compartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,loose equipment could strike someone. Storeall these in the proper place.

The compact spare tire is for temporary use only.Replace the compact spare tire with a full-size tire assoon as you can. See Compact Spare Tire onpage 5-84. See the storage instructions label to returnyour compact spare tire to your trunk properly.

A. RetainerB. CoverC. Compact Spare TireD. NutE. JackF. Wheel WrenchG. Extension and

Protective GuideH. Bolt ScrewI. Foam Holder

5-83

Compact Spare TireAlthough the compact spare tire was fully inflated whenyour vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time.Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be60 psi (420 kPa).

After installing the compact spare on your vehicle, youshould stop as soon as possible and make sureyour spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spareis made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph(105 km/h) for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km),so you can finish your trip and have your full-sizetire repaired or replaced where you want. You mustcalibrate the tire inflation monitor system after installingor removing the compact spare. See Tire PressureMonitor System on page 5-63. The system may not workcorrectly when the compact spare is installed on thevehicle. Of course, it’s best to replace your spare with afull-size tire as soon as you can. Your spare will lastlonger and be in good shape in case you need it again.

Notice: When the compact spare is installed, don’ttake your vehicle through an automatic car washwith guide rails. The compact spare can get caughton the rails. That can damage the tire and wheel,and maybe other parts of your vehicle.

Don’t use your compact spare on other vehicles.

And don’t mix your compact spare tire or wheel withother wheels or tires. They won’t fit. Keep your spare tireand its wheel together.

Notice: Tire chains won’t fit your compact spare.Using them can damage your vehicle and candamage the chains too. Don’t use tire chains onyour compact spare.

5-84

Appearance CareRemember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Someare toxic. Others can burst into flames if you strike amatch or get them on a hot part of the vehicle. Some aredangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closedspace. When you use anything from a container to cleanyour vehicle, be sure to follow the manufacturer’swarnings and instructions. And always open your doorsor windows when you are cleaning the inside.

Never use these to clean your vehicle:

• Gasoline

• Benzene

• Naphtha

• Carbon Tetrachloride

• Acetone

• Paint Thinner

• Turpentine

• Lacquer Thinner

• Nail Polish Remover

They can all be hazardous — some more than others —and they can all damage your vehicle, too.

Do not use any of these unless this manual says youcan. In many uses, these will damage your vehicle:

• Alcohol

• Laundry Soap

• Bleach

• Reducing Agents

Cleaning the Inside of Your VehicleUse a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust andloose dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic and paintedsurfaces with a clean, damp cloth.

Cleaning Fabric/CarpetYour dealer has cleaners for the cleaning of fabricand carpet. They will clean normal spots and stainsvery well.

You can get GM-approved cleaning products from yourdealer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials onpage 5-91.

5-85

Here are some cleaning tips:

• Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.

• Clean up stains as soon as you can — beforethey set.

• Carefully scrape off any excess stain.

• Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a cleanarea often. A soft brush may be used if stainsare stubborn.

• If a ring forms on fabric after spot cleaning, cleanthe entire area immediately or it will set.

Using Cleaner on Fabric1. Vacuum and brush the area to remove any

loose dirt.

2. Always clean a whole trim panel or section. Masksurrounding trim along stitch or welt lines.

3. Follow the directions on the container label.

4. Apply cleaner with a clean sponge. Do not saturatethe material and do not rub it roughly.

5. As soon as you have cleaned the section, use asponge to remove any excess cleaner.

6. Wipe cleaned area with a clean, water-dampenedtowel or cloth.

7. Wipe with a clean cloth and let dry.

Special Fabric Cleaning ProblemsStains caused by such things as catsup, coffee (black),egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urineand blood can be removed as follows:

1. Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge thesoiled area with cool water.

2. If a stain remains, follow the cleaning instructionsdescribed earlier.

3. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine, treatthe area with a water and baking soda solution:1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml)of lukewarm water.

4. Let dry.

Stains caused by candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chilisauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows:

1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.

2. Clean with cool water and allow to dry completely.

3. If a stain remains, follow the cleaner instructionsdescribed earlier.

5-86

Cleaning VinylUse warm water and a clean cloth.

• Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt. Youmay have to do this more than once.

• Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain ifyou do not get them off quickly. Use a clean clothand vinyl cleaner. See your dealer for this product.

Cleaning LeatherUse a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap orsaddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, letthe leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.

• For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner.

• Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasivecleaners, furniture polish or shoe polish on leather.

• Soiled or stained leather should be cleanedimmediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the finish,it can harm the leather.

Cleaning the Top of the InstrumentPanelUse only mild soap and water to clean the top surfacesof the instrument panel. Sprays containing siliconesor waxes may cause annoying reflections in thewindshield and even make it difficult to see through thewindshield under certain conditions.

Cleaning Interior Plastic ComponentsUse only a mild soap and water solution on a soft clothor sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect thesurface finish.

Cleaning Glass SurfacesGlass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner or aliquid household glass cleaner will remove normaltobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass. SeeVehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-91.

Notice: Don’t use abrasive cleaners on glass,because they may cause scratches. Avoid placingdecals on the inside rear window, since theymay have to be scraped off later. If abrasive cleanersare used on the inside of the rear window, anelectric defogger element may be damaged. Anytemporary license should not be attached across thedefogger grid.

5-87

Care of Safety BeltsKeep belts clean and dry.

{CAUTION:

Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, itmay severely weaken them. In a crash, theymight not be able to provide adequateprotection. Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

WeatherstripsSilicone grease on weatherstrips will make them lastlonger, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Applysilicone grease with a clean cloth at least every sixmonths. During very cold, damp weather more frequentapplication may be required. See Part D: RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 6-16.

Cleaning the Outside of YourVehicleThe paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depthof color, gloss retention and durability.

Washing Your VehicleThe best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keepit clean by washing it often with lukewarm or coldwater.

Do not wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.Use a car washing soap. Do not use strong soapsor chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well,removing all soap residue completely. You can getGM-approved cleaning products from your dealer. SeeVehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-91.Do not use cleaning agents that are petroleum based,or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agentsshould be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on thesurface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft,clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surfacescratches and water spotting.

High pressure car washes may cause water to enteryour vehicle.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/LensesUse only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a carwashing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.Follow instructions under “Washing Your Vehicle.”

5-88

Finish CareOccasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle byhand may be necessary to remove residue from thepaint finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning productsfrom your dealer. See Vehicle Care/AppearanceMaterials on page 5-91.

Your vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish.The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the coloredbasecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that arenon-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoatpaint finish.

Notice: Machine compounding or aggressivepolishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish maydull the finish or leave swirl marks.

Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and othersalts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, birddroppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remainon painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon aspossible. If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners thatare marked safe for painted surfaces to removeforeign matter.

Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weatherand chemical fallout that can take their toll over aperiod of years. You can help to keep the paint finishlooking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or coveredwhenever possible.

Cleaning Windshield and Wiper BladesIf the windshield is not clear after using the windshieldwasher, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,wax, sap or other material may be on the bladeor windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a full-strengthglass cleaning liquid. The windshield is clean if beads donot form when you rinse it with water.

Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper bladesand affect their performance. Clean the blade bywiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strengthwindshield washer solvent. Then rinse the bladewith water.

Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;replace blades that look worn.

5-89

Cleaning Aluminum WheelsKeep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth withmild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. Afterrinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A waxmay then be applied.

The surface of these wheels is similar to the paintedsurface of your vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes onthem because you could damage the surface. Do notuse chrome polish on aluminum wheels.

Do not take your vehicle through an automatic car washthat has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. Thesebrushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.

Cleaning TiresTo clean your tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.

Notice: When applying a tire dressing, always takecare to wipe off any overspray or splash from allpainted surfaces on the body or wheels of thevehicle. Petroleum-based products may damage thepaint finish and tires.

Sheet Metal DamageIf your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metalrepair or replacement, make sure the body repair shopapplies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosion protection.

Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide thecorrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.

Finish DamageAny stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in thefinish should be repaired right away. Bare metalwill corrode quickly and may develop into majorrepair expense.

Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-upmaterials avaliable from your dealer. Larger areas offinish damage can be corrected in your dealer’sbody and paint shop.

5-90

Underbody MaintenanceChemicals used for ice and snow removal and dustcontrol can collect on the underbody. If these are notremoved, corrosion and rust can develop on theunderbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan andexhaust system even though they have corrosionprotection.

At least every spring, flush these materials from theunderbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mudand debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas ofthe frame should be loosened before being flushed.Your dealer or an underbody car washing system cando this for you.

Chemical Paint SpottingSome weather and atmospheric conditions can create achemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon andattack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This damagecan take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,and small, irregular dark spots etched into the paintsurface.

Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM willrepair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces ofnew vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,whichever occurs first.

Vehicle Care/Appearance MaterialsSee your GM dealer for more information on purchasingthe following products.

Vehicle Care/Appearance MaterialsDescription Usage

Polishing ClothWax-Treated

Interior and exteriorpolishing cloth.

Tar and Road OilRemover

Removes tar, road oil andasphalt.

Chrome Cleaner andPolish

Use on chrome orstainless steel.

White Sidewall TireCleaner

Removes soil and blackmarks from whitewalls.

Vinyl CleanerCleans vinyl tops,upholstery andconvertible tops.

Glass Cleaner Removes dirt, grime,smoke and fingerprints.

Chrome and Wire WheelCleaner

Removes dirt and grimefrom chrome wheels andwire wheel covers.

5-91

Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials(cont’d)

Description Usage

Finish Enhancer

Removes dust,fingerprints, and surfacecontaminants. Spray onwipe off.

Swirl Remover Polish

Removes swirl marks,fine scratches and otherlight surfacecontamination.

Cleaner Wax Removes light scratchesand protects finish.

Foaming Tire Shine LowGloss

Cleans, shines andprotects in one easy step,no wiping necessary.

Wash Wax Concentrate

Medium foamingshampoo. Cleans andlightly waxes.Biodegradable andphosphate free.

Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials(cont’d)

Description Usage

Spot Lifter

Quickly and easilyremoves spots and stainsfrom carpets, vinyl andcloth upholstery.

Odor Eliminator

Odorless spray odoreliminator used onfabrics, vinyl, leather andcarpet.

See your General Motors parts department for theseproducts. See Part D: Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 6-16.

5-92

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears ona plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, onthe driver’s side. You can see it if you look through thewindshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN alsoappears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Partslabels and the certificates of title and registration.

Engine IdentificationThe 8th character in your VIN is the engine code. Thiscode will help you identify your engine, specificationsand replacement parts.

Service Parts Identification LabelYou’ll find this label on the inside of your trunk lid. It’svery helpful if you ever need to order parts. On thislabel is:

• your VIN,

• the model designation,

• paint information and

• a list of all production options and specialequipment.

Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.

5-93

Electrical System

Add-On Electrical EquipmentNotice: Don’t add anything electrical to yourvehicle unless you check with your dealer first.Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicleand the damage wouldn’t be covered by yourwarranty. Some add-on electrical equipment cankeep other components from working as theyshould.

Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attemptingto add anything electrical to your vehicle, seeServicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-60.

Headlamp WiringThe headlamp circuit is protected by individual fuses inthe underhood fuse block. An electrical overload willcause the fuse to blow. If this happens, have yourheadlamp system checked right away.

Windshield Wiper FusesThe windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuitbreaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavysnow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools. Ifthe overload is caused by some electrical problem, haveit fixed.

5-94

Power Windows and Other PowerOptionsA circuit breaker in the driver’s side instrument panelfuse block protects the power windows and other poweraccessories. When the current load is too heavy, thecircuit breaker opens and closes, protecting thecircuit until the problem is fixed.

Fuses and Circuit BreakersThe wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected fromshort circuits by a combination of fuses. This greatlyreduces the chance of fires caused by electricalproblems.

Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If theband is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure youreplace a bad fuse with a new one of the identicalsize and rating.

5-95

Driver’s Side Instrument Panel FuseBlock

Some fuses are in a fuseblock at the end of theinstrument panel onthe driver’s side of thevehicle. Pull off the coverlabeled FUSES toexpose the fuses.

5-96

Fuses UsagePCM/BCM/CLSTR

Powertrain Control Module, BodyControl Module, Cluster (Ignition 0)

WSW Windshield Wipers, WindshieldWasher

PCM (CRANK) Powertrain Control Module (Crank)CIG/AUX Accommodated Device (Accessory)BCM Body Control Module (Accessory)SRS Supplemental Restraint SystemABS/PCM Anti-Lock Brake System, Powertrain

Control Module, Brake Switch,Crank Relay, Canister Vent Solenoid(Run, Crank)

STOP Brake Lamps, Body Control Module(Run, Crank)

TURN SIGNAL Turn Signal Flashers

CRUISE Cruise Control Steering ColumnControls

AC/CRUISE HVAC Temp Door Motors & Module,Cruise Control Module

A/C FAN HVAC BlowerSTR COL Steering Wheel Lighting

Fuses Usage

DR LK Body Control Module, Door LockControls

PWR MIR Power Mirrors

CLSTR/BCM Cluster, Body Control Module, DataLink Connector (Battery)

LH HTDST/BCM

Driver’s Heated Seat, Body ControlModule, Battery Controlled Loads

CircuitBreakers Usage

RETAINEDACCESSORYPWR BRKR

Power Window, Sunroof Breaker

Relays UsageHEADLAMPRELAY Headlamp Relay

RETAINEDACCESSORYPWR RELAY

Retained Accessory Power Relay

5-97

Passenger’s Side Instrument PanelFuse Block

Some fuses are in a fuseblock at the end of theinstrument panel onthe passenger’s side of thevehicle. Pull off thecover labeled FUSES toexpose the fuses.

5-98

Fuses UsageRH HTD ST Passenger Heated SeatPWR DROP Accommodated DeviceB/U LP Back-Up Lamps

DIC/RKE Driver Information Center, RemoteKeyless Entry, HVAC

TRK/ROOFBRP Trunk Lamps, Headliner Lamps

HVAC BLO HVAC Blower RelayI/P BRP Instrument Panel Footwell LampsHTD MIR Heated MirrorsBRK SW Brake SwitchHAZ SW Hazard SwitchREAR PRK LP Rear Parking LampsAUX PWR Accessory Power Outlet (Battery)C/LTR Cigarette Lighter

RADIO Radio, Radio Amplifier, RemoteDigital Radio Receiver

FRT PARK LP Front Parking Lamps,Instrumentation Lighting

Relays UsagePARK LPRELAY Parking Lamps Relay

BACK UP LPRELAY Back-up Lamps Relay

BATT RUNDOWNPROTECTIONRELAY

Battery Run Down Protection Relay

REAR DEFOGRELAY

Rear Defogger Relay, Heated MirrorRelay

CircuitBreakers Usage

POWERSEATS BRKR Power Seat Circuit Breaker

REAR DEFOGBRKR Rear Defogger Breaker

5-99

Underhood Fuse Block (Upper)Some fuses are in a fuse block in the enginecompartment on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12for more information on location.

Relays UsageFUEL PUMP Fuel PumpDRL RELAY Daytime Running LampsA.I.R. RELAY Air Induction Reaction RelayCRANK RLY Starter (Crank) RelayHORNS HornFOG LTS Fog Lamps

Fuses UsageLEFT I/P Left Fuse Block (Battery)RT I/P #1 Right Fuse Block (Battery)RT I/P #2 Right Fuse Block (Battery)U/HOOD #1 Underhood (Top) Fuse BlockHORN RLY Horn RelayBLANK BlankBLANK BlankFOG RLY Fog Lamps RelayF/PMP RLY Fuel Pump Relay

DRL/EXIT LTS Low (Left Front) & High (Left Front)Headlamps

EXT LTS Low (Right Front) & High (RightFront) Headlamps

PCM PCM BatteryA/C RLY(CMPR)

HVAC Compressor Relay &Generator

5-100

Underhood Fuse Block (Lower)Some fuses are in a fuse block in the enginecompartment on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12for more information on location.

Relays Usage

FAN CONT #3 Secondary Cooling Fan(Passenger’s Side)

FAN CONT #2 Cooling Fan Control RelayFAN CONT #1 Primary Cooling fan (Driver’s Side)IGN RELAY Ignition RelayA/C CMPR HVAC Compressor

5-101

Fuses UsageIGN SW Ignition SwitchRT I/P #3 Rear Defogger, Audio SystemU/HOOD #2 Ignition Relay, AIR PumpCOOLINGFANS Cooling Fans (Battery)

FAN CONT #2& #3 Cooling Fan Control Relays #2 & #3

FAN CONT #1 Cooling Fan Control Relays #1

AIR PMP RLY Air Induction Reaction Pump Relay(Battery)

Fuses UsageFUEL INJ Fuel InjectorsTRANS SOL Transmission SolenoidsA/C RLY(COIL) HVAC Control Relay

ENG DEVICESCanister Purge Solenoid, Mass AirFlow Sensor (MAF), AIR PumpRelay & Valve Control

DFI MDL Direct Fire Ignition Module

OXY SEN Oxygen Sensor (Pre and PostConverter)

5-102

Capacities and SpecificationsPlease refer to Part D: Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 6-16 for more information.

ApplicationCapacities

English MetricAir Conditioning Refrigerant R-134a 2.4 lbs 1.1 kg

Automatic TransaxlePan Removal and ReplacementAfter Complete Overhaul

When draining/replacing converter, more fluid may beneeded.

7.4 quarts10 quarts

7.0 L9.5 L

Cooling System Including Reservoir3400 (Code E) V63800 (Code K) V6

11.3 quarts11.7 quarts

10.7 L11.0 L

Engine Oil with Filter3400 (Code E) V63800 (Code K) V6

4.0 quarts4.5 quarts

3.8 L4.2 L

Fuel Tank 17.0 gallons 64.0 L

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-16.

5-103

Engine Specifications

Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Pug Gap Firing OrderWheel Nut

Torque

3400 (LA1) V6 E 4T65E 0.060 inches(1.52 mm) 1–2–3–4–5–6 100 lb ft

140Y

3800 (L36) V6 K 4T65E 0.060 inches(1.52 mm) 1–6–5–4–3–2 100 lb ft

140Y

5-104

Normal Maintenance Replacement PartsNormal Maintenance Replacement Parts

Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter A1614C*

Passenger Compartment Air Filter GM Part No. 10406026

All Engines PF47*

Automatic Transmission Filter 24206433*

Spark Plugs3400 (Code E) V63800 (Code K) V6

41–101*41–101*

Windshield Wiper BladesLengthType

22.0 inches (56.0 cm)Shepherd’s Hook

*AC Delco® part number.

5-105

✍ NOTES

5-106

Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2Introduction ...................................................6-2Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2How This Section is Organized .........................6-3Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services ...........6-4Using Your Maintenance Schedule ....................6-4Scheduled Maintenance ...................................6-5Part B: Owner Checks and Services ................6-10At Each Fuel Fill ..........................................6-10At Least Once a Month .................................6-10At Least Twice a Year ...................................6-11

At Least Once a Year ...................................6-11Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections .........6-14Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle

Boot and Seal Inspection ............................6-14Exhaust System Inspection ............................6-14Fuel System Inspection ..................................6-15Engine Cooling System Inspection ...................6-15Throttle System Inspection .............................6-15Brake System Inspection ................................6-15Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ....6-16Part E: Maintenance Record ...........................6-17

Section 6 Maintenance Schedule

6-1

Maintenance Schedule

IntroductionImportant: Keep engine oil at the proper level andchange as recommended.

Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plansupplements your new vehicle warranties. See yourWarranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealerfor details.

Your Vehicle and the EnvironmentProper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep yourvehicle in good working condition, but also helps theenvironment. Improper vehicle maintenance caneven affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improperfluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increasethe level of emissions from your vehicle. To help protectour environment, and to keep your vehicle in goodcondition, be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.

Maintenance RequirementsMaintenance intervals, checks, inspections andrecommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in thismanual are necessary to keep your vehicle in goodworking condition. Any damage caused by failureto follow scheduled maintenance may not be coveredby warranty.

6-2

How This Section is OrganizedThis maintenance schedule is divided into five parts:

“Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services” explainswhat to have done and how often. Some of theseservices can be complex, so unless you are technicallyqualified and have the necessary equipment, youshould let your GM dealer’s service department dothese jobs.

Your GM dealer has GM-trained and supported servicepeople that will perform the work using genuineGM parts.

{CAUTION:

Performing maintenance work on a vehicle canbe dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, youcan be seriously injured. Do your ownmaintenance work only if you have therequired know-how and the proper tools andequipment for the job. If you have any doubt,have a qualified technician do the work.

If you want to get the service information, see ServicePublications Ordering Information on page 7-11.

“Part B: Owner Checks and Services” tells you whatshould be checked and when. It also explains whatyou can easily do to help keep your vehicle ingood condition.

“Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections” explainsimportant inspections that your dealer’s servicedepartment can perform for you.

“Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” listssome recommended products necessary to helpkeep your vehicle properly maintained. These products,or their equivalents, should be used whether you dothe work yourself or have it done.

“Part E: Maintenance Record” is a place for youto record and keep track of the maintenance performedon your vehicle. Keep your maintenance receipts.They may be needed to qualify your vehicle forwarranty repairs.

6-3

Part A: Scheduled MaintenanceServicesThis part contains engine oil scheduled maintenancewhich explains the engine oil life system and howit indicates when to change the engine oil and filter.Also, listed are scheduled maintenance services whichare to be performed at the mileage intervals specified.

Using Your Maintenance ScheduleWe at General Motors want to keep your vehicle in goodworking condition. But we don’t know exactly howyou’ll drive it. You may drive short distances only a fewtimes a week. Or you may drive long distances allthe time in very hot, dusty weather. You may use yourvehicle in making deliveries. Or you may drive it towork, to do errands or in many other ways.

Because of the different ways people use their vehicles,maintenance needs may vary. You may need morefrequent checks and replacements. So please readthe following and note how you drive. If you havequestions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,see your dealer.

This part tells you the maintenance services you shouldhave done and when to schedule them.

When you go to your dealer for your service needs,you’ll know that GM-trained and supported servicepeople will perform the work using genuine GM parts.

The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed inPart D. Make sure whoever services your vehicle usesthese. All parts should be replaced and all necessaryrepairs done before you or anyone else drivesthe vehicle.

This schedule is for vehicles that:

• carry passengers and cargo within recommendedlimits. You will find these on your vehicle’sTire-Loading Information label. See Loading YourVehicle on page 4-32.

• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legaldriving limits.

• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octaneon page 5-5.

6-4

Scheduled MaintenanceThe services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles(166 000 km) should be repeated after 100,000 miles(166 000 km) at the same intervals for the life ofthis vehicle. The services shown at 150,000 miles(240 000 km) should be repeated at the same intervalafter 150,000 miles (240 000 km) for the life ofthis vehicle.

See Part B: Owner Checks and Services on page 6-10and Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections onpage 6-14.

Footnotes† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or theCalifornia Air Resources Board has determined that thefailure to perform this maintenance item will not nullifythe emission warranty or limit recall liability prior tothe completion of the vehicle ’s useful life. We, however,urge that all recommended maintenance services beperformed at the indicated intervals and themaintenance be recorded.

Whenever the tires are rotated, the Tire Inflation MonitorSystem (if equipped) must be reset.

+ A good time to check your brakes is during tirerotation. See Brake System Inspection on page 6-15.

6-5

Engine Oil Scheduled MaintenanceChange engine oil and filter as indicated by the GMOil Life System (or every 12 months, whicheveroccurs first). Reset the system.

Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you knowwhen to change the engine oil and filter. This isbased on engine revolutions and engine temperature,and not on mileage. Based on driving conditions,the mileage at which an oil change will be indicated canvary considerably. For the oil life system to workproperly, you must reset the system every time the oil ischanged.

When the system has calculated that oil life has beendiminished, it will indicate that an oil change isnecessary. A CHANGE ENGINE OIL message willcome on. Change your oil as soon as possible withinthe next two times you stop for fuel. It is possible that, ifyou are driving under the best conditions, the oil lifesystem may not indicate that an oil change is necessaryfor over a year. However, your engine oil and filtermust be changed at least once a year and at this timethe system must be reset. Your dealer has GM-trainedservice people who will perform this work usinggenuine GM parts and reset the system.

It is also important to check your oil regularly and keepit at the proper level.

If the system is ever reset accidentally, you mustchange your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since yourlast oil change. Remember to reset the oil life systemwhenever the oil is changed. See Engine Oil onpage 5-16 for information on resetting the system.

An Emission Control Service.

See the mileage intervals following for additionalservices that may be performed with an engine oilchange. After the services are performed, record thedate, odometer reading and who performed the serviceon the maintenance record pages in Part E of thisschedule.

6-6

7,500 Miles (12 500 km)❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on

page 5-65 for proper rotation pattern and additionalinformation. (See footnote .) (See footnote +.)

15,000 Miles (25 000 km)❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace

the filter. If vehicle is driven in dusty/dirty conditions,inspect filter at every engine oil change. SeeEngine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-22 for moreinformation. An Emission Control Service. (Seefootnote †.)

❑ If Equipped: Replace passenger compartment airfilter. If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,the filter may require replacement more often.

❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation onpage 5-65 for proper rotation pattern and additionalinformation. (See footnote .) (See footnote +.)



30,000 Miles (50 000 km)❑ If Equipped: Replace passenger compartment air

filter. If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,the filter may require replacement more often.


❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 5-22 for more information.An Emission Control Service.







6-7

50,000 Miles (83 000 km)❑ Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the

vehicle is mainly driven under one or more ofthese conditions:

− In heavy city traffic where the outsidetemperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) orhigher

− In hilly or mountainous terrain.− When doing frequent trailer towing.− Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery

service.

If you do not use your vehicle under any of theseconditions, change the fluid and filter at 100,000 miles(166 000 km).















6-8







100,000 Miles (166 000 km)❑ Inspect spark plug wires. An Emission Control

Service.❑ Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service.

❑ Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if thevehicle is mainly driven under one or more ofthese conditions:

− In heavy city traffic where the outsidetemperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) orhigher.

− In hilly or mountainous terrain.− When doing frequent trailer towing.− Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery

service.❑ If you haven’t used your vehicle under severe

conditions listed previously and, therefore, haven’tchanged your automatic transaxle fluid, change boththe fluid and filter.

150,000 Miles (240 000 km)❑ Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every

60 months since last service, whichever occurs first).See Engine Coolant on page 5-27 for what to use.Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressurecap and neck. Pressure test the cooling systemand pressure cap. An Emission Control Service.

❑ Inspect engine accessory drive belt. An EmissionControl Service.

6-9

Part B: Owner Checks and ServicesListed in this part are owner checks and serviceswhich should be performed at the intervals specified tohelp ensure the safety, dependability and emissioncontrol performance of your vehicle.

Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to yourvehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shownin Part D.

At Each Fuel FillIt is important for you or a service station attendant toperform these underhood checks at each fuel fill.

Engine Oil Level CheckCheck the engine oil level and add the proper oil ifnecessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-16 forfurther details.

Engine Coolant Level CheckCheck the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL®

coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolanton page 5-27 for further details.

Windshield Washer Fluid Level CheckCheck the windshield washer fluid level in the windshieldwasher tank and add the proper fluid if necessary.See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5-44 for furtherdetails.

At Least Once a Month

Tire Inflation CheckVisually inspect your tires and make sure tires areinflated to the correct pressures. Don’t forget to checkyour spare tire. See Tires on page 5-61 for furtherdetails.

Cassette Tape Player ServiceClean cassette tape player. Cleaning should be doneevery 50 hours of tape play. See Audio System(s)on page 3-53 for further details.

6-10

At Least Twice a Year

Restraint System CheckMake sure the safety belt reminder light and all yourbelts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchoragesare working properly. Look for any other loose ordamaged safety belt system parts. If you see anythingthat might keep a safety belt system from doing itsjob, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safetybelts replaced.

Also look for any opened or broken air bag coverings,and have them repaired or replaced. (The air bagsystem does not need regular maintenance.)

Wiper Blade CheckInspect wiper blades for wear or cracking. Replaceblade inserts that appear worn or damaged or thatstreak or miss areas of the windshield. Also seeCleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle on page 5-88.

Weatherstrip LubricationSilicone grease on weatherstrips will make them lastlonger, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Applysilicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,damp weather more frequent application may berequired. See Part D: Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 6-16.

Automatic Transaxle CheckCheck the transaxle fluid level; add if needed. SeeAutomatic Transaxle Fluid on page 5-24. A fluid lossmay indicate a problem. Check the system and repairif needed.

At Least Once a Year

Key Lock Cylinders ServiceLubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricantspecified in Part D.

Body Lubrication ServiceLubricate all hinges and latches, including those for thebody doors, hood, secondary latch, pivots, springanchor, release pawl, rear compartment, glove box door,console door and any folding seat hardware. Part Dtells you what to use. More frequent lubrication may berequired when exposed to a corrosive environment.

6-11

Starter Switch Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this check, the vehiclecould move suddenly. If it does, you or otherscould be injured. Follow the steps below.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regularbrake. See Parking Brake on page 2-27 ifnecessary.Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready toturn off the engine immediately if it starts.

3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The startershould work only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).If the starter works in any other position, yourvehicle needs service.

Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock ControlSystem Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this check, the vehiclecould move suddenly. If it does, you or otherscould be injured. Follow the steps below.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enough roomaround the vehicle. It should be parked on a levelsurface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brakeon page 2-27 if necessary.Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately ifthe vehicle begins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn the key to the ON position,but don’t start the engine. Without applying theregular brake, try to move the shift lever outof PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift levermoves out of PARK (P), your vehicle needs service.

6-12

Ignition Transaxle Lock CheckWhile parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turnthe ignition key to OFF in each shift lever position.

• The key should turn to OFF only when the shift leveris in PARK (P).

• The key should come out only in OFF.

Parking Brake and Automatic TransaxlePark (P) Mechanism Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this check, your vehiclecould begin to move. You or others could beinjured and property could be damaged. Makesure there is room in front of your vehicle incase it begins to roll. Be ready to apply theregular brake at once should the vehicle beginto move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facingdownhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set theparking brake.

• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: Withthe engine running and transaxle in NEUTRAL(N), slowly remove foot pressure from the regularbrake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by theparking brake only.

• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holdingability: With the engine running, shift to PARK (P).Then release the parking brake followed by theregular brake.

Underbody Flushing ServiceAt least every spring, use plain water to flush anycorrosive materials from the underbody. Take care toclean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debriscan collect.

6-13

Part C: PeriodicMaintenance InspectionsListed in this part are inspections and services whichshould be performed at least twice a year (for instance,each spring and fall). You should let your dealer’sservice department do these jobs. Make sure anynecessary repairs are completed at once.

Proper procedures to perform these services may befound in a service manual. See Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 7-11.

Steering, Suspension and FrontDrive Axle Boot and Seal InspectionInspect the front and rear suspension and steeringsystem for damaged, loose or missing parts, signs ofwear or lack of lubrication. Inspect the power steeringlines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,cracks, chafing, etc. Clean and then inspect the driveaxle boot seals for damage, tears or leakage. Replaceseals if necessary.

Exhaust System InspectionInspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the bodynear the exhaust system. Look for broken, damaged,missing or out-of-position parts as well as open seams,holes, loose connections or other conditions whichcould cause a heat build-up in the floor pan or could letexhaust fumes into the vehicle. See Engine Exhauston page 2-31.

6-14

Fuel System InspectionInspect the complete fuel system for damage or leaks.

Engine Cooling System InspectionInspect the hoses and have them replaced if theyare cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,fittings and clamps; replace as needed. Clean theoutside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser.To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test ofthe cooling system and pressure cap is recommendedat least once a year.

Throttle System InspectionInspect the throttle system for interference or binding,and for damaged or missing parts. Replace partsas needed. Replace any components that have higheffort or excessive wear. Do not lubricate acceleratorand cruise control cables.

Brake System InspectionInspect the complete system. Inspect brake lines andhoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotorsfor surface condition. Inspect other brake parts,including calipers, parking brake, etc. You may need tohave your brakes inspected more often if your drivinghabits or conditions result in frequent braking.

6-15

Part D: Recommended Fluids andLubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name, partnumber or specification may be obtained from yourdealer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil

Engine oil with the AmericanPetroleum Institute Certified forGasoline Engines starburst symbolof the proper viscosity. To determinethe preferred viscosity for yourvehicle’s engine, see Engine Oil onpage 5-16.

Engine Coolant

50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and use only DEX-COOL®

Coolant. See Engine Coolant onpage 5-27.

Hydraulic BrakeSystem

Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid orequivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.

WindshieldWasher Solvent

GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent orequivalent.

Power SteeringSystem

GM Power Steering Fluid (GM PartNo. U.S. 1052884, in Canada993294, or equivalent).

AutomaticTransaxle

DEXRON®-III AutomaticTransmission Fluid.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Key LockCylinders

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, inCanada 10953474, or equivalent).

Hood LatchAssembly,Secondary

Latch, Pivots,Spring Anchorand Release

Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GMPart No. U.S. 12346293, in Canada992723, or equivalent) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood and DoorHinges

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, inCanada 109435474, or equivalent).

WeatherstripConditioning

Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM PartNo. U.S. 12345579, in Canada10953014, or equivalent).

6-16

Part E: Maintenance RecordAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading and who performed the service andany additional information from “Owner Checks and Services” or “Periodic Maintenance” on the following recordpages. Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

Date OdometerReading Serviced By Maintenance Record

6-17

Maintenance Record (cont’d)

Date OdometerReading Serviced By Maintenance Record

6-18

Customer Assistance Information ......................7-2Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2Online Owner Center ......................................7-3Customer Assistance for Text Telephone

(TTY) Users ...............................................7-4Customer Assistance Offices ............................7-4GM Mobility Program for Persons with

Disabilities ..................................................7-5Roadside Assistance Program ..........................7-5Courtesy Transportation ...................................7-7

Reporting Safety Defects ................................7-10Reporting Safety Defects to the United States

Government ..............................................7-10Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian

Government ..............................................7-10Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .....7-10Service Publications Ordering Information .........7-11

Section 7 Customer Assistance Information

7-1

Customer AssistanceInformation

Customer Satisfaction ProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill are important toyour dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concernswith the sales transaction or the operation of yourvehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or servicedepartments. Sometimes, however, despite the bestintentions of all concerned, misunderstandings canoccur. If your concern has not been resolved to yoursatisfaction, the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member ofdealership management. Normally, concerns canbe quickly resolved at that level. If the matter hasalready been reviewed with the sales, service or partsmanager, contact the owner of the dealership orthe general manager.

STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealershipmanagement, it appears your concern cannot beresolved by the dealership without further help, contactthe Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center by calling1-800-222-1020. In Canada, contact GM of CanadaCustomer Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call the toll-free number in orderto give your inquiry prompt attention. Please havethe following information available to give the CustomerAssistance Representative:

• Vehicle Identification Number (This is available fromthe vehicle registration or title, or the plate at thetop left of the instrument panel and visible throughthe windshield.)

• Dealership name and location

• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage

When contacting Chevrolet, please remember that yourconcern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if youhave a concern.

STEP THREE: Both General Motors and your dealerare committed to making sure you are completelysatisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continueto remain unsatisfied after following the procedureoutlined in Steps One and Two, you should file with theGM/BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additionalrights you may have. Canadian owners refer toyour Warranty and Owner Assistance Informationbooklet for information on the Canadian Motor VehicleArbitration Plan (CAMVAP).

7-2

The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court programadministered by the Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehiclerepairs or the interpretation of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Although you may be required toresort to this informal dispute resolution program prior tofiling a court action, use of the program is free ofcharge and your case will generally be heard within40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given inyour case, you may reject it and proceed with any othervenue for relief available to you.

You may contact the BBB using the toll-free telephonenumber or write them at the following address:

BBB Auto LineCouncil of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1804

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100

This program is available in all 50 states and the Districtof Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves theright to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinueits participation in this program.

Online Owner CenterThe Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownershipneeds. You can find your specific vehicle informationall in one place.

The Owner Center allows you to:

• Get e-mail service reminders.

• Access information about your specific vehicle,including tips and videos and an electronicversion of this owner’s manual. (United States only)

• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history andmaintenance schedule.

• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.

• Receive special promotions and privileges onlyavailable to members. (United States only)

Refer to the web for updated information.

To register your vehicle, visit www.MyGMLink.com.(United States) or My GM Canada withinwww.gmcanada.com (Canada).

7-3

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) UsersTo assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, orspeech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its CustomerAssistance Center. Any TTY user can communicatewith Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV (2438).(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)

Customer Assistance OfficesChevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-freenumber for assistance. If a U.S. customer wishesto write to Chevrolet, the letter should be addressed toChevrolet’s Customer Assistance Center.

United States – Customer AssistanceChevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170

1-800-222-10201-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA® (243-8872)Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From Puerto Rico:1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From U.S. Virgin Islands:1-800-496-9994Fax Number: 313-381-0022

Canada – Customer AssistanceGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, 163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices(TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800

Overseas – Customer AssistancePlease contact the local General Motors Business Unit.

7-4

Mexico, Central America and CaribbeanIslands/Countries (Except PuertoRico and U.S. Virgin Islands) –Customer Assistance

General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterPaseo de la Reforma # 2740Col. Lomas de BezaresC.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.01-800-508-0000Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800

GM Mobility Program for Personswith Disabilities

This program, available toqualified applicants, canreimburse you up to$1,000 toward aftermarketdriver or passengeradaptive equipment youmay require for yourvehicle (hand controls,wheelchair/scooterlifts, etc.).

This program can also provide you with free resourceinformation, such as area driver assessment centers andmobility equipment installers. The program is availablefor a limited period of time from the date of vehiclepurchase/lease. See your dealer for more details or callthe GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.

GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program. Call1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. All TTY userscall 1-800-263-3830.

Roadside Assistance ProgramTo enhance Chevrolet’s strong commitment to customersatisfaction, Chevrolet is excited to announce theestablishment of the Chevrolet Roadside AssistanceCenter. As the owner of a 2003 Chevrolet, membershipin Roadside Assistance is free.

Roadside Assistance is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year, by calling 1-800-CHEV-USA(243-8872). This toll-free number will provide youover-the-phone roadside assistance with minormechanical problems. If your problem cannot beresolved over the phone, our advisors have access to anationwide network of dealer recommended serviceproviders. Roadside membership is free; however someservices may incur costs.

7-5

Roadside offers two levels of service to the customer,Basic Care and Courtesy Care:

Roadside Basic Care provides:

• Toll-free number, 1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872),text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-888-889-2438

• Free towing for warranty repairs

• Basic over-the-phone technical advice

• Available dealer services at reasonable costs (i.e.,wrecker services, locksmith/key service, glassrepair, etc.)

Roadside Courtesy Care provides:

• Roadside Basic Care services (as outlinedpreviously)Plus:

• FREE Non-Warranty Towing (to the closest dealerfrom a legal roadway)

• FREE Locksmith/Key Service (when keys are loston the road or locked inside)

• FREE Flat Tire Service (spare installed on the road)

• FREE Jump Start (at home or on the road)

• FREE Fuel Delivery ($5 of fuel delivered onthe road)

Chevrolet offers Courtesy Transportation for customersneeding warranty service. Courtesy Transportationwill be offered in conjunction with the coverage providedby the Bumper-to-Bumper New Vehicle LimitedWarranty to eligible purchasers of 2003 Chevroletpassenger cars and light duty trucks. (See your sellingdealer for details.)

Courtesy Care is available to retail and retail leasecustomers operating 2003 and newer Chevrolet vehiclesfor a period of 3 years/36,000 miles (60 000 km),whichever occurs first. All Courtesy Care services mustbe pre-arranged by Chevrolet Roadside or dealerservice management.

Basic Care and Courtesy Care are not part of orincluded in the coverage provided by the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Chevrolet reserves the right tomodify or discontinue Basic Care and Courtesy Careat any time.

The Roadside Assistance Center uses companies thatwill provide you with quality and priority service.When roadside services are required, our advisors willexplain any payment obligations that may be incurredfor utilizing outside services.

7-6

For prompt assistance when calling, please have thefollowing available to give to the advisor;

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

• License plate number

• Vehicle color

• Vehicle location

• Telephone number where you can be reached

• Vehicle mileage

• Description of problem

Canadian Roadside AssistanceVehicles purchased in Canada have an extensiveRoadside Assistance program accessible from anywherein Canada or the United States. Please refer to theWarranty and Owner Assistance Information book.

Courtesy TransportationChevrolet has always exemplified quality and value inits offering of motor vehicles. To enhance yourownership experience, we and our participating dealersare proud to offer Courtesy Transportation, a customersupport program for new vehicles.

The Courtesy Transportation program is offered toretail purchase/lease customers in conjunction withthe Bumper-to-Bumper coverage provided by the NewVehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation optionsare available when warranty repairs are required. Thiswill reduce your inconvenience during warranty repairs.

7-7

Plan Ahead When PossibleWhen your vehicle requires warranty service, youshould contact your dealer and request an appointment.By scheduling a service appointment and advisingyour service consultant of your transportation needs,your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.

If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the servicedepartment immediately, keep driving it until it can bescheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem issafety-related. If it is, please call your dealership, letthem know this, and ask for instructions.

If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicleoff for service, you are urged to do so as early inthe work day as possible to allow for same day repair.

Transportation OptionsWarranty service can generally be completed while youwait. However, if you are unable to wait Chevrolethelps minimize your inconvenience by providing severaltransportation options. Depending on the circumstances,your dealer can offer you one of the following:

Shuttle ServiceParticipating dealers can provide you with shuttleservice to get you to your destination with minimalinterruption of your daily schedule. This includes a oneway shuttle ride to a destination up to 10 miles fromthe dealership.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursementIf your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,reimbursement up to $30 per day (five day maximum)may be available for the use of public transportationsuch as taxi or bus. In addition, should you arrangetransportation through a friend or relative,reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses up to$10 per day (five day maximum) may be available.Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and besupported by original receipts.

7-8

Courtesy Rental VehicleWhen your vehicle is unavailable due to overnightwarranty repairs, your dealer may arrange to provideyou with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for arental vehicle you obtained, at actual cost, up to amaximum of $30.00 per day supported by receipts. Thisrequires that you sign and complete a rental agreementand meet state, local and rental vehicle providerrequirements. Requirements vary and may includeminimum age requirements, insurance coverage, creditcard, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage chargesand may also be responsible for taxes, levies,usage fees, excessive mileage or rental usage beyondthe completion of the repair.

Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as acourtesy rental.

Additional Program InformationCourtesy Transportation is available during theBumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period, but it isnot part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Aseparate booklet entitled “Warranty and OwnerAssistance Information” furnished with each new vehicleprovides detailed warranty coverage information.

Courtesy Transportation is available only at participatingdealers and all program options, such as shuttleservice, may not be available at every dealer. Pleasecontact you dealer for specific information aboutavailability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangementswill be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.

Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs duringthe Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the GeneralMotors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty,alternative transportation may be available under theCourtesy Transportation Program. Please consultyour dealer for details.

General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation atany time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibilitypursuant to the terms and conditions describedherein at its sole discretion.

7-9

Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to theUnited States GovernmentIf you believe that your vehicle has a defect which couldcause a crash or could cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform the National Highway TrafficSafety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists ina group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedycampaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved inindividual problems between you, your dealer orGeneral Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto SafetyHotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 inthe Washington, D.C. area) or write to:

NHTSA, U.S. Department of TransportationWashington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain other information about motorvehicle safety from the hotline.

Reporting Safety Defects to theCanadian GovernmentIf you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehiclehas a safety defect, you should immediately notifyTransport Canada, in addition to notifying GeneralMotors of Canada Limited. You may write to:

Transport Canada330 Sparks StreetTower COttawa, Ontario K1A 0N5

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) ina situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify us.Please call us at 1-800-222-1020, or write:

Chevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170

7-10

In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, 163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Service Publications OrderingInformation

Service ManualsService Manuals have the diagnosis and repairinformation on engines, transmission, axle, suspension,brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $120.00

Transmission, Transaxle, TransferCase Unit Repair ManualThis manual provides information on unit repair serviceprocedures, adjustments, and specifications for GMtransmissions, transaxles, and transfer cases.


Service BulletinsService Bulletins give technical service informationneeded to knowledgeably service General Motors carsand trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions toassist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.

In Canada, information pertaining to Product ServiceBulletins can be obtained by contacting your GeneralMotors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE(1-800-463-7483).

Owner’s InformationOwner publications are written specifically for ownersand intended to provide basic operational informationabout the vehicle. The owner’s manual will includethe Maintenance Schedule for all models.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual, andWarranty Booklet.


Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.


7-11

Current and Past Model Order FormsService Publications are available for current andpast model GM vehicles. To request an order form,please specify year and model name of the vehicle.

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM EasternTimeFor Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on theWorld Wide Web at: www.helminc.com

Or you can write to:

Helm, IncorporatedP. O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Prices are subject to change without notice and withoutincurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.

Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices arequoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to makechecks payable in U.S. funds.

7-12

AAccessory Power Outlets ................................. 3-19Adding Washer Fluid ....................................... 5-44Additional Program Information ........................... 7-9Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-6Add-On Electrical Equipment ............................ 5-94Adjusting the Speakers

(Balance/Fade) ............................ 3-57, 3-67, 3-79Air Bag Systems ............................................. 1-51

How Does an Air Bag Restrain? .................... 1-57Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle ......... 1-60What Makes an Air Bag Inflate? .................... 1-57What Will You See After an Air

Bag Inflates? ........................................... 1-58When Should an Air Bag Inflate? ................... 1-56Where Are the Air Bags? .............................. 1-54

Air Bag ......................................................... 3-33Readiness Light .......................................... 3-33

Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-22ALARM (Content Theft Operation) ..................... 2-50AM ............................................................... 3-91Antenna, Backglass ......................................... 3-93Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System .. 3-94Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ............................ 4-6Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light .............. 3-35

Appearance Care ............................................ 5-85Care of Safety Belts .................................... 5-88Chemical Paint Spotting ............................... 5-91Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle ................ 5-85Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle .............. 5-88Finish Damage ............................................ 5-90Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 5-90Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-91Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ................ 5-91Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-88

Arming with the Power Lock Switch ................... 2-16Arming with the Remote Keyless

Entry Transmitter ......................................... 2-17Ashtrays ........................................................ 3-21Audio System(s) ............................................. 3-53

Audio Steering Wheel Controls ...................... 3-90Backglass Antenna ...................................... 3-93Care of Your Cassette Tape Player ................ 3-91Care of Your CD Player ............................... 3-92Care of Your CDs ........................................ 3-92Chime Level Adjustment ............................... 3-94Radio with Cassette and CD ......................... 3-75Radio with Cassette ..................................... 3-54Radio with CD ............................................ 3-64Setting the Time .......................................... 3-53Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................ 3-89

1

Audio System(s) (cont.)Understanding Radio Reception ..................... 3-91Vehicle Customization Settings ...................... 3-94XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ............ 3-94

AUTOLOCK (Automatic Door Lockand Unlock) ................................................ 2-47

Automatic Transaxle Check .............................. 6-11Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock Control

System Check ............................................. 6-12Automatic Transaxle ........................................ 5-24

Fluid .......................................................... 5-24Operation ................................................... 2-23

Auxiliary Power Connection (Power Drop) ........... 3-20

BBackglass Antenna .......................................... 3-93Backing Up .................................................... 4-38Battery Replacement ......................................... 2-7Battery Rundown Protection ............................. 3-18Battery Warning Message ................................ 3-42Battery .......................................................... 5-48Before Leaving on a Long Trip ......................... 4-22Body Lubrication Service .................................. 6-11Brake Fluid .................................................... 5-45Brake Wear ................................................... 5-47Brake ............................................................ 3-47

Low Fluid Warning Message ......................... 3-47Parking ...................................................... 2-27

Brake (cont.)System Inspection ....................................... 6-15System Warning Light .................................. 3-34

Brakes .......................................................... 5-45Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-8Braking ........................................................... 4-6Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 2-18Bulb Replacement ........................................... 5-56

Back-Up Lamps ........................................... 5-59Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-56Headlamp Aiming ........................................ 5-55Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, and

Parking Lamps ......................................... 5-56Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 5-59Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and

Sidemarker Lamps ................................... 5-58Buying New Tires ........................................... 5-67

CCalifornia Fuel .................................................. 5-6Canada – Customer Assistance .......................... 7-4Canadian Owners ................................................ iiCanadian Roadside Assistance ........................... 7-7Capacities and Specifications .......................... 5-103Carbon Monoxide ................... 4-25, 4-34, 2-10, 2-31Care of ......................................................... 5-88

Safety Belts ................................................ 5-88Your Cassette Tape Player ............................ 3-91

2

Care of (cont.)Your CD Player ........................................... 3-92Your CDs ................................................... 3-92

Cassette Tape Messages ......................... 3-63, 3-86Cassette Tape Player Service ........................... 6-10CD Adapter Kits ..................................... 3-63, 3-87Center Console Storage Area ........................... 2-43Center Front Passenger Position,

Safety Belts ................................................ 1-23Chains, Tires .................................................. 5-71Change Engine Oil Message ............................ 3-44Check Engine Light ......................................... 3-37Checking Coolant ............................................ 5-28Checking Engine Oil ........................................ 5-16Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 5-10Checking Your Restraint Systems ...................... 1-61Check ........................................................... 3-37

Engine Light ............................................... 3-37Chemical Paint Spotting ................................... 5-91Child Restraints .............................................. 1-37

Child Restraint Systems ............................... 1-37Infants and Young Children ........................... 1-33Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for

Children (LATCH System) .......................... 1-43Older Children ............................................. 1-31Securing a Child Restraint Designed

for the LATCH System .............................. 1-45Securing a Child Restraint in a

Rear Seat Position ................................... 1-45

Child Restraints (cont.)Securing a Child Restraint in the

Right Front Seat Position .......................... 1-48Top Strap Anchor Location ............................ 1-42Top Strap ................................................... 1-41Where to Put the Restraint ........................... 1-40

Chime Level Adjustment .................................. 3-94CHIRP (Horn Chirp Timer) ............................... 2-51Cigarette Lighter ............................................. 3-21Cleaning Aluminum Wheels .............................. 5-90Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ....................... 5-88Cleaning Fabric/Carpet .................................... 5-85Cleaning Glass Surfaces .................................. 5-87Cleaning Interior Plastic Components ................. 5-87Cleaning Leather ............................................ 5-87Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Panel ........... 5-87Cleaning Tires ................................................ 5-90Cleaning Vinyl ................................................ 5-87Cleaning Windshield and Wiper Blades .............. 5-89Cleaning ........................................................ 5-85

Inside of Your Vehicle .................................. 5-85Outside of Your Vehicle ................................ 5-88Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-91Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-88

Climate Control System ................................... 3-26Air Filter, Passenger Compartment ................. 3-26Dual .......................................................... 3-22Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 3-25

Compact Disc Messages .......................... 3-75, 3-89

3

Compact Spare Tire ........................................ 5-84Compass Variance .......................................... 3-50Console Shift Lever ......................................... 2-29Content Theft-Deferrent .................................... 2-16Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-5Convenience Net ............................................ 2-43Coolant ......................................................... 3-36

Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 3-36Heater, Engine ............................................ 2-22Hot Temperature Warning Message ................ 3-42

Cooling System .............................................. 5-33Courtesy Lamps ............................................. 3-17Cruise Control Light ........................................ 3-39Cruise Control ................................................ 3-11Current and Past Model Order Forms ................ 7-12Customer Assistance Information ........................ 7-7

Courtesy Transportation .................................. 7-7Customer Assistance for Text

Telephone (TTY) Users ............................... 7-4Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 7-4Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 7-2GM Mobility Program for Persons with

Disabilities ................................................ 7-5Reporting Safety Defects to

General Motors ........................................ 7-10Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government .............................. 7-10

Customer Assistance Information (cont.)Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government ......................... 7-10Roadside Assistance Program ......................... 7-5Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-11

DDaytime Running Lamps/Automatic Headlamp

System ...................................................... 3-15Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-2Defogging and Defrosting ................................. 3-24Delayed Entry Lighting ..................................... 3-17Delayed Exit Lighting ....................................... 3-18Delayed Headlamps ........................................ 3-16Dinghy Towing ................................................ 4-31Disarming with the Remote Keyless Entry

Transmitter ................................................. 2-17Disarming with Your Key .................................. 2-17Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-4Dolly Towing .................................................. 4-32Dome Lamp ................................................... 3-18Door ............................................................. 3-45

Ajar Warning Message ................................. 3-45Locks .......................................................... 2-8Power Door Locks ......................................... 2-9Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............... 2-9

4

Door (cont.)Driver Information Center (DIC) ......................... 3-49Driver ............................................................ 1-15

Position, Safety Belt ..................................... 1-15Driver’s Side Instrument Panel Fuse Block ......... 5-96Driving On Grades .......................................... 4-39Driving on Snow or Ice .................................... 4-26Driving Through Deep Standing Water ............... 4-19Driving Through Flowing Water ......................... 4-19Driving with a Trailer ....................................... 4-38Driving .......................................................... 4-16

At Night ..................................................... 4-16City ........................................................... 4-20Defensive ..................................................... 4-2Drunken ....................................................... 4-2Freeway ..................................................... 4-21Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-23In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-17Winter ........................................................ 4-25

Dual Climate Control System ............................ 3-22

EElectrical System ............................................ 5-94

Add-On Equipment ...................................... 5-94Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-95Headlamp Wiring ......................................... 5-94Power Windows and Other Power Options ...... 5-95Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................... 5-94

Electrical System (cont.)Emergency Trunk Release Handle ..................... 2-12Emissions Inspection and

Maintenance Programs ................................. 3-39Engine Coolant Level Check ............................. 6-10Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing .................. 4-40Engine Oil Additives ........................................ 5-20Engine Oil Level Check ................................... 6-10Engine .......................................................... 5-22

Air Cleaner/Filter ......................................... 5-22Battery ....................................................... 5-48Change Oil Message ................................... 3-44Check and Service Engine Soon Light ............ 3-37Compartment Overview ................................ 5-12Coolant Heater ............................................ 2-22Coolant Temperature Gage ........................... 3-36Coolant ...................................................... 5-27Cooling System Inspection ............................ 6-15Exhaust ..................................................... 2-31Low Oil Level Message ................................ 3-43Oil ............................................................. 5-16Overheating ................................................ 5-30Starting ...................................................... 2-19

Entry Lighting ................................................. 3-17Erasing HomeLink® Buttons .............................. 2-42EXIT (Exit Feature Customization Mode) ............ 2-53Express-Down Window .................................... 2-14Extender, Safety Belt ....................................... 1-30Exterior Lamps ............................................... 3-14

5

FFilter ............................................................. 5-22

Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 5-22Finding a PTY Station

(RDS and XM™) ......................... 3-58, 3-68, 3-80Finding a Station ............................ 3-56, 3-66, 3-78Finish Care .................................................... 5-89Finish Damage ............................................... 5-90Flash-to-Pass ................................................... 3-9Flat Tire, Changing ......................................... 5-72Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-71Fluid ............................................................. 5-24

Automatic Transaxle ..................................... 5-24Power Steering ........................................... 5-43Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-44

FM Stereo ..................................................... 3-91FOB HORN (Remote Audible Verification) ........... 2-49FOB LIGHT (Remote Visual Verification) ............ 2-48FOB PROG (Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter

Programming) ............................................. 2-53Fog Lamps .................................................... 3-16Folding Rear Seat ............................................ 1-7Following Distance .......................................... 4-38Front Storage Area ......................................... 2-43Fuel ............................................................... 5-5

Additives ...................................................... 5-6California Fuel .............................................. 5-6

Fuel (cont.)Filling a Portable Fuel Container ..................... 5-9Filling Your Tank ........................................... 5-7Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5-6Gage ......................................................... 3-40Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-5Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-5Low Warning Message ................................. 3-47System Inspection ....................................... 6-15

Fuses ........................................................... 5-95Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-95Windshield Wiper ......................................... 5-94

GGage ............................................................ 3-36

Engine Coolant Temperature ......................... 3-36Fuel .......................................................... 3-40Speedometer .............................................. 3-31Tachometer ................................................. 3-32

Garage Door Opener ....................................... 2-39Gasoline ......................................................... 5-5

Octane ........................................................ 5-5Specifications ............................................... 5-5

Gate Operator and Canadian Programming ........ 2-41Glove Box ..................................................... 2-43GM Mobility Program for Persons with

Disabilities .................................................... 7-5

6

HHazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-6Head Restraints ............................................... 1-6Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .................... 3-8Headlamp Wiring ............................................ 5-94Headlamp ...................................................... 5-55

Aiming ....................................................... 5-55Headlamps .................................................... 5-56

Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-56Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-56Headlamps, Front Turn Signal,

and Parking Lamps .................................. 5-56Heated Outside Mirrors .................................... 2-36Heated Seats ................................................... 1-4Highbeam Out Warning Message ...................... 3-48Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-23Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-23Hitches .......................................................... 4-37HomeLink Transmitter, Programming .................. 2-39HomeLink® Transmitter .................................... 2-39Hood ............................................................ 5-10

Checking Things Under ................................ 5-10Release ..................................................... 5-10

Horn ............................................................... 3-7Hot Coolant Temperature Warning Message ........ 3-42How to Add Coolant to the Coolant

Recovery Tank ............................................ 5-35How to Add Coolant to the Radiator .................. 5-38How to Add Fluid ............................................ 5-26

How to Check Power Steering Fluid .................. 5-43How to Check ........................................ 5-24, 5-62How to Inspect the Engine Air

Cleaner/Filter .............................................. 5-22How to Use This Manual ...................................... iiHow to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-14Hydroplaning .................................................. 4-19

IIf No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine .......... 5-32If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine ............... 5-31If the Light Is Flashing ..................................... 3-38If the Light Is on Steady .................................. 3-38If You Are Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ....... 4-30If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer ..................... 4-35If You’re Caught in a Blizzard ........................... 4-28Ignition Positions ............................................. 2-18Ignition Transaxle Lock Check .......................... 6-13Illumination on Remote Activation ........................ 2-6Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-33Inflation -- Tire Pressure .................................. 5-62Inspection ...................................................... 6-15

Brake System ............................................. 6-15Engine Cooling System ................................ 6-15Exhaust System .......................................... 6-14Fuel System ............................................... 6-15Part C - Periodic Maintenance ....................... 6-14Steering, Suspension and Front

Drive Axle Boot and Seal .......................... 6-14

7

Inspection (cont.)Throttle System ........................................... 6-15

Instrument Panel Brightness ............................. 3-17Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-29

Cluster ....................................................... 3-29Overview ..................................................... 3-4

Interior Lamps ................................................ 3-17

JJump Stating .................................................. 5-49

Key Lock Cylinders Service .............................. 6-11Keyless Entry System ....................................... 2-3Keys ............................................................... 2-2

LLamps ........................................................... 3-14

Exterior ...................................................... 3-14Interior ....................................................... 3-17

Lap Belt ........................................................ 1-24Lap-Shoulder Belt ................................... 1-15, 1-26LATCH System ............................................... 1-43

Child Restraints ........................................... 1-43Securing a Child Restraint Designed

for the LATCH System .............................. 1-45Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine Running ... 2-29

Leaving Your Vehicle ....................................... 2-10Light ............................................................. 3-33

Air Bag Readiness ....................................... 3-33Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ................... 3-35Brake System Warning ................................. 3-34Cruise Control ............................................. 3-39Malfunction Indicator .................................... 3-37Safety Belt Reminder ................................... 3-32TCS Warning Light ...................................... 3-35Traction Control System (TCS) Warning .......... 3-35

Loading Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-32Lockout Protection .......................................... 2-10Locks ............................................................. 2-8

Door ........................................................... 2-8Leaving Your Vehicle .................................... 2-10Lockout Protection ....................................... 2-10Power Door .................................................. 2-9Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............... 2-9

Loss of Control ............................................... 4-14Low Brake Fluid Warning Message .................... 3-47Low Engine Oil Level Message ......................... 3-43Low Fuel Warning Message ............................. 3-47Low Oil Pressure Message ............................... 3-43Low Tire Message .......................................... 3-44Low Washer Fluid Warning Message ................. 3-46LT DELAY (Delayed Headlamp Illumination) ........ 2-47Lumbar ........................................................... 1-3

Manual Controls ............................................ 1-3

8

MMaintenance, Normal Replacement Parts .......... 5-105Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-10

At Each Fuel Fill ......................................... 6-10At Least Once a Month ................................ 6-10At Least Once a Year .................................. 6-11At Least Twice a Year .................................. 6-11Brake System Inspection .............................. 6-15Engine Cooling System Inspection ................. 6-15Exhaust System Inspection ........................... 6-14Fuel System Inspection ................................ 6-15How This Section is Organized ....................... 6-3Introduction .................................................. 6-2Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2Part A - Scheduled Maintenance Services ......... 6-4Part B - Owner Checks and Services ............. 6-10Part C - Periodic Maintenance Inspections ...... 6-14Part D - Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . 6-16Part E - Maintenance Record ........................ 6-17Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 6-5Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle

Boot and Seal Inspection .......................... 6-14Throttle System Inspection ............................ 6-15Using Your ................................................... 6-4Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2

Maintenance When Trailer Towing ..................... 4-40

Making Turns ................................................. 4-38Malfunction Indicator Light ................................ 3-37Manual Lumbar Controls .................................... 1-3Manual Operation ........................................... 3-22Manual Seats ................................................... 1-2Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle ............... 2-6Message ....................................................... 3-42

Battery Warning .......................................... 3-42Center ....................................................... 3-40Change Engine Oil ...................................... 3-44Door Ajar Warning ....................................... 3-45Highbeam Out Warning ................................ 3-48Hot Coolant Temperature Warning .................. 3-42Low Brake Fluid Warning .............................. 3-47Low Engine Oil Level ................................... 3-43Low Fuel Warning ....................................... 3-47Low Oil Pressure ......................................... 3-43Low Tire ..................................................... 3-44Low Washer Fluid Warning ........................... 3-46Security ..................................................... 3-46Service Traction System Warning ................... 3-41Service Vehicle Soon ................................... 3-48Traction Active ............................................ 3-41Trunk Ajar Warning ...................................... 3-45

Mexico, Central America and Caribbean Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico and U.S. VirginIslands) – Customer Assistance ....................... 7-5

9

Mirrors .......................................................... 2-35Automatic Dimming Rearview with OnStar® ..... 2-35Automatic Dimming Rearview ........................ 2-34Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ............. 2-33Manual Rearview Mirror ................................ 2-33Outside Convex Mirror ................................. 2-36Outside Power Mirrors .................................. 2-36

MyGMLink.com ................................................ 7-3

NNew Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-18Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ........... 5-105

OOdometer ...................................................... 3-31Off-Road Recovery .......................................... 4-12OIL LIFE (GM Oil Life System Reset) ................ 2-46Oil ................................................................ 5-16

Engine ....................................................... 5-16Pressure Message ....................................... 3-43

Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-31Online Owner Center ........................................ 7-3OnStar® Personal Calling ................................. 2-38OnStar® Services ............................................ 2-37OnStar® System ............................................. 2-37OnStar® Virtual Advisor .................................... 2-38Operation Tips ................................................ 3-26

ORIG. SET (Return to the Original Settings) ....... 2-52Other Warning Devices ...................................... 3-6Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-25Outside ......................................................... 2-36

Convex Mirror ............................................. 2-36Power Mirrors ............................................. 2-36

Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode ... 5-30Overseas – Customer Assistance ........................ 7-4Owners, Canadian ............................................... iiOwner’s Information ........................................ 7-11

PParade Dimming ............................................. 3-18Park (P) ........................................................ 2-30

Shifting Out of ............................................ 2-30Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle

Park (P) Mechanism Check ........................... 6-13Parking on Hills .............................................. 4-39Parking ......................................................... 2-27

Brake ........................................................ 2-27Over Things That Burn ................................. 2-31

Park(P) ......................................................... 2-27Shifting Into ................................................ 2-27

Part A - Scheduled Maintenance Services ............ 6-4Part B - Owner Checks and Services ................ 6-10Part C - Periodic Maintenance Inspections .......... 6-14Part D - Recommended Fluids and Lubricants .... 6-16Part E - Maintenance Record ........................... 6-17

10

Passenger Compartment Air Filter ..................... 3-26Passenger’s Side Instrument Panel Fuse Block ... 5-98Passing ................................................. 4-13, 4-38Passlock® ...................................................... 2-17 .iiPlan Ahead When Possible ................................ 7-8Playing a Cassette Tape .......................... 3-62, 3-85Playing a Compact Disc .......................... 3-73, 3-87Playing the Radio ........................... 3-55, 3-65, 3-77Power Steering ............................................... 4-10Power ........................................................... 3-19

Accessory Outlets ........................................ 3-19Auxiliary Connection ..................................... 3-20Door Locks .................................................. 2-9Drop .......................................................... 3-20Electrical System ......................................... 5-95Six-Way Seats .............................................. 1-3Steering Fluid ............................................. 5-43Windows .................................................... 2-14

Programmable Automatic Door Locks .................. 2-9Programmable Modes ............................... 2-9, 2-45Programming the HomeLink Transmitter ............. 2-39

QQuestions and Answers About Safety Belts ......... 1-13

RRadiator Pressure Cap .................................... 5-30Radio Data System (RDS) ............... 3-54, 3-64, 3-75Radio Messages ............................. 3-59, 3-70, 3-82Radios .......................................................... 3-53

Care of Your Cassette Tape Player ................ 3-91Care of Your CD Player ............................... 3-92Care of Your CDs ........................................ 3-92Radio with Cassette and CD ......................... 3-75Radio with Cassette ..................................... 3-54Radio with CD ............................................ 3-64Setting the Time .......................................... 3-53Theft-Deterrent ............................................ 3-89Understanding Reception .............................. 3-91

RDS Messages .............................. 3-58, 3-69, 3-81Reading Lamps .............................................. 3-18Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ...................... 1-28Rear Seat Passenger Positions ......................... 1-25Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .................. 1-25Rear Storage Area .......................................... 2-43Rear Window Defogger .................................... 3-25Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with

OnStar® ..................................................... 2-35Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming .................. 2-34Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ........................... 2-33Rearview Mirrors ............................................. 2-33

11

Reclining Seatbacks .......................................... 1-4Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-31Remote Keyless Entry System, Operation ............ 2-4Remote Keyless Entry System ............................ 2-3Remote Trunk Release .................................... 2-11Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare

Tire ........................................................... 5-76Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... 5-73Removing the Wheel Covers and the

Wheel Nut Caps .......................................... 5-75Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 5-59Replacing Brake System Parts .......................... 5-48Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash .. 1-62Reporting Safety Defects ................................. 7-10

Canadian Government .................................. 7-10General Motors ........................................... 7-10United States Government ............................ 7-10

Reprogramming a Single HomeLink® Button ....... 2-42Resetting Defaults ........................................... 2-42Resetting the Trip Computer ............................. 3-52Restraint System Check ................................... 6-11

Checking Your Restraint Systems ................... 1-61Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash .......................................... 1-62Restraint Systems ........................................... 1-61

Checking .................................................... 1-61Replacing Parts ........................................... 1-62

Resynchronization ............................................. 2-7

Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................... 2-19Right Front Passenger Position, Safety Belts ...... 1-23Roadside ......................................................... 7-5

Assistance Program ....................................... 7-5Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out ................... 4-30Running Your Engine While You Are Parked ....... 2-32

SSafety Belt ..................................................... 3-32

Reminder Light ............................................ 3-32Safety Belts ................................................... 5-88

Care of ...................................................... 5-88Center Front Passenger Position .................... 1-23Driver Position ............................................ 1-15How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-14Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ..... 1-13Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children

and Small Adults ...................................... 1-28Rear Seat Passengers ................................. 1-25Right Front Passenger Position ...................... 1-23Safety Belt Extender .................................... 1-30Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ................. 1-22Safety Belts Are for Everyone ......................... 1-9

Safety Chains ................................................. 4-37Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iiiScheduled Maintenance ..................................... 6-5

12

Seat ............................................................... 1-6Head Restraints ............................................ 1-6

Seats .............................................................. 1-4Heated Seats ............................................... 1-4Manual Lumbar ............................................. 1-3Manual ........................................................ 1-2Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 1-4Six-Way Power Seats .................................... 1-3Split Folding Rear Seat .................................. 1-7

Securing a Child Restraint ................................ 1-45Designed for the LATCH System ................... 1-45Rear Seat Position ...................................... 1-45Right Front Seat Position .............................. 1-48

Service Bulletins ............................................. 7-11Service Manuals ............................................. 7-11Service ........................................................... 5-3

Adding Equipment to the Outsideof Your Vehicle .......................................... 5-4

Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-4Engine Soon Light ....................................... 3-37Message .................................................... 3-46Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-11Traction System Warning Message ................. 3-41Vehicle Soon Message ................................. 3-48

Setting Preset Stations .................... 3-56, 3-66, 3-78Setting the Time ............................................. 3-53Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble) .......... 3-57, 3-67, 3-79SETTINGS (Display Current Settings) ................ 2-45Sheet Metal Damage ....................................... 5-90Shifting Into Park (P) ....................................... 2-27

Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................... 2-30Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................... 1-17Skidding ........................................................ 4-15Some Other Rainy Weather Tips ....................... 4-19Special Fabric Cleaning Problems ..................... 5-86Specifications, Capacities ............................... 5-103Speedometer .................................................. 3-31Split Folding Rear Seat ..................................... 1-7Starter Switch Check ....................................... 6-12Starting Your 3400 V6 Engine ........................... 2-20Starting Your 3800 Series II V6 Engine .............. 2-21Starting Your Engine ....................................... 2-19Steering Column Shift Lever ............................. 2-28Steering in Emergencies .................................. 4-11Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle

Boot and Seal Inspection .............................. 6-14Steering Tips .................................................. 4-10Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ......................... 3-90Steering ........................................................ 4-10Storage Areas ................................................ 2-43

Center Console Storage Area ........................ 2-43Convenience Net ......................................... 2-43Front Storage Area ...................................... 2-43Glove Box .................................................. 2-43Rear Storage Area ....................................... 2-43

Storing the Flat Tire and Tools .......................... 5-81Storing the Spare Tire and Tools ....................... 5-83Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ...................... 4-30Sun Visors ..................................................... 2-15Sunroof ......................................................... 2-44

13

TTachometer .................................................... 3-32Taillamps ....................................................... 5-58

Turn Signal, Stoplamps and SidemarkerLamps .................................................... 5-58

TCS Warning Light .......................................... 3-35Theft-Deterrent, Radio ..................................... 3-89Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-16

Content Theft-Deterrent ................................ 2-16Passlock® ................................................... 2-17

Throttle System Inspection ............................... 6-15Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 3-7Tire Inflation Check ......................................... 6-10TIRE MON (Tire Inflation Monitor Reset) ............ 2-46Tire ............................................................... 3-44

Low Message ............................................. 3-44Tires ............................................................. 5-61

Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-67Chains ....................................................... 5-71Changing a Flat Tire .................................... 5-72Compact Spare Tire ..................................... 5-84If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-71Inflation -- Tire Pressure ............................... 5-62Inspection and Rotation ................................ 5-65Pressure Monitor System .............................. 5-63Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 5-68Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-69Wheel Replacement ..................................... 5-69When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 5-66

Tires (cont.)To Use the Engine Coolant Heater .................... 2-22Top Strap Anchor Location ............................... 1-42Top Strap ...................................................... 1-41Torque Lock ................................................... 2-30Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires .................. 4-37Towing .......................................................... 4-31

Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 4-31Towing a Trailer .......................................... 4-34Your Vehicle ............................................... 4-31

Traction ......................................................... 3-41Active Message ........................................... 3-41Control System (TCS) .................................... 4-9Control System Warning Light ....................... 3-35Service Traction System Warning Message ..... 3-41

Trailer Brakes ................................................. 4-37Transaxle Operation, Automatic ......................... 2-23Transaxle ....................................................... 5-24

Fluid, Automatic ........................................... 5-24Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer Case Unit

Repair Manual ............................................ 7-11Transmitter Verification ...................................... 2-5Transportation Options ...................................... 7-8Trip Computer ................................................ 3-52Trip Odometer ................................................ 3-31TRNKJAMB (Trunk Jamb) ................................ 2-51Trunk Ajar Warning Message ............................ 3-45Trunk Assist Handle ........................................ 2-11Trunk Lock .................................................... 2-11Trunk ............................................................ 2-10

14

Turn and Lane-Change Indicator ......................... 3-8Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-7Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer .................. 4-39

UUnderbody Flushing Service ............................. 6-13Underhood Fuse Block (Lower) ....................... 5-101Underhood Fuse Block (Upper) ....................... 5-100Understanding Radio Reception ........................ 3-91Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 5-68United States – Customer Assistance .................. 7-4Used Replacement Wheels .............................. 5-70Using Cleaner on Fabric .................................. 5-86Using HomeLink® ........................................... 2-42

VVehicle Identification ........................................ 5-93

Number (VIN) ............................................. 5-93Service Parts Identification Label ................... 5-93

Vehicle Personalization .................................... 2-45Vehicle Storage .............................................. 5-49Vehicle ............................................................ 4-5

Control ........................................................ 4-5Customization Settings ................................. 3-94Damage Warnings ........................................... ivLoading ...................................................... 4-32Service Soon Message ................................. 3-48Symbols ......................................................... iv

Vehicle (cont.)Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 3-25Visor Vanity Mirrors ......................................... 2-15Visors ........................................................... 2-15

WWarning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-28Warnings ......................................................... 3-6

Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-6Other Warning Devices .................................. 3-6Safety and Symbols ......................................... iiiVehicle Damage .............................................. iv

Washer Fluid Low Warning Message ................. 3-46Washing Your Vehicle ...................................... 5-88Weatherstrip Lubrication ................................... 6-11Weight of the Trailer Tongue ............................. 4-36Weight of the Trailer ........................................ 4-36What Kind of Engine Oil to Use ........................ 5-18What to Do with Used Oil ................................ 5-22What to Use .......................................... 5-28, 5-44Wheels .......................................................... 5-69

Alignment and Tire Balance .......................... 5-69Replacement ............................................... 5-69

When to Add Engine Oil .................................. 5-17When to Change Engine Oil

(GM Oil Life System) ................................... 5-20When to Check and Change ............................ 5-24When to Check Power Steering Fluid ................ 5-43When to Check .............................................. 5-62

15

When to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ..... 5-22When You Are Ready to Leave After

Parking on a Hill ......................................... 4-40Where to Put the Restraint ............................... 1-40Why Safety Belts Work .................................... 1-10Window Lock Out ........................................... 2-15Windows ....................................................... 2-13

Power ........................................................ 2-14Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check ................ 6-10Windshield Washer ......................................... 3-10

Fluid .......................................................... 5-44Windshield Wiper ............................................ 5-60

Blade Replacement ...................................... 5-60Fuses ........................................................ 5-94

Windshield Wipers ............................................ 3-9Winter Driving ................................................ 4-25Wiper Blade Check ......................................... 6-11

XXM™ Radio Satellite Service (USA Only) ........... 3-64XM™ Radio Satellite Service

(USA Only) ......................................... 3-54, 3-76XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ................ 3-94XM™ Satellite Radio Service

(USA Only) ................................................. 3-91

YYour Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2

16

2003 Chevrolet Impala Owner Manual M

Documents

Transcript of 2003 Chevrolet Impala Owner Manual M